Skip to main content

Full text of "Modern chemistry"

See other formats


GIFT   OF 


Th'E  TEMPLE  PRIMERS 


MODERN   CHEMISTRY 
Theoretical 

By 
WILLIAM  RAMSAY,  D.Sc. 


THE  HON.  ROBERT  BOYLE 


CHEMISTRY 

THEORETICAL 


RAmSAY-DS? 


19008K  29&UO  BEDFORD-STaEET^UQPOKZN 


rights   reserved 


MODERN     CHEMISTRY 

FIRST    PART 
THEORETICAL    CHEMISTRY 

CHAPTER 
INTRODUCTORY 

Elements — Phlogiston — Discovery  of  Oxygen — Com= 
bining  Proportions— Dalton's  Laws— Gay*  L  us = 
sac's  Law  of  Volumes — Avogadro's  Hypothesis — 
A  tomic  Weigh  ts  —  M olecular  Weigh  ts  —  D ulong 
and  Pet  it's  Law — Equivalents — Isomorphism. 

ONE  of  the  earliest  questions  asked  by  an  intelligent  child 
is  :  "  What  is  this  made  of?  "  "  What  is  that  made  of? " 
And  the  answer  is  generally  more  or  less  satisfactory. 
For  example,  if  the  question  relates  to  butter,  the  reply 
may  be,  "  From  milk."  It  may  be  explained,  besides, 
that  when  milk  is  beaten  up,  or  churned,  the  butter  sepa- 
rates, leaving  skim-milk  behind.  But  the  question  has  not 
been  answered.  The  child  may  ask,  "  Was  the  butter  in 
the  milk  before  it  was  churned  ?  or  has  it  been  made  out 
of  the  milk  by  the  churning?"  Possibly  the  person  to 
whom  the  question  is  addressed  may  know  that  the  milk 
contained  the  butter  in  the  state  of  fine  globules,  and  that 
the  process  of  churning  b:eaks  up  the  globules,  and  causes 
them  to  stick  together.  The  original  question  has  not  really 
been  answered ;  and  indeed  it  is  not  an  easy  one  to  reply  to. 
Precisely  such  questions  suggested  themselves  to  the  people 
of  old,  and  they  led  to  many  speculations. 

4 


:  .CHEMISTRY 

.^Qn&  of  .these  speculations  was  that  things 
whichl\v»e  see'ar"olihd"uk  wer.^  ,b\iihu,p  out  of  elements,  just 
as  a  word  is  built  up  out  of  letters.  Indeed,  the  word 
elemens,  which  is  the  Latin  word  for  element,  is  pro- 
bably derived  from  the  letters  /,  m,  and  «,  and  involves 
that  idea.  The  ancient  Greeks  surmised  that  there  were 
four  such  elements — earth,  water,  air,  and  fire.  But  as  it 
was  obvious  that  some  things,  for  instance  gold  and  silver, 
did  not  contain  either  water  or  air,  the  word  element  was 
often  used  to  signify,  not  the  constituent  of  a  thing,  but 
rather  a  property  of  a  thing ;  and  it  might  have  been  said 
that  gold  partook  of  the  properties  of  earth  and  water, 
because,  like  earth,  it  is  not  altered  by  being  heated,  and 
yet  it  can  take  a  fluid  form  like  water  if  heated  hot  enough. 
Hence  the  old  word  " element"  had  a  double  meaning; 
it  was  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  "  constituent,"  and 
sometimes  more  in  the  sense  of  "  property." 

If  a  child  is  given  a  mechanical  toy,  his  wish  to  see  how 
it  works  generally  leads  to  his  taking  it  to  bits.  This  is 
unfortunately  only  too  easy ;  but  it  is  seldom  that  he 
succeeds  in  putting  it  together  again.  Now,  if  we  inquire 
what  a  piece  of  wood  or  stone  is  made  of,  we  can,  after  a 
fashion,  take  them  to  bits  ;  we  may  pull  the  wood  into 
fibres,  or  we  may  crush  the  stone,  and  pick  out  the  pieces 
that  appear  to  differ  from  each  other  in  colour,  if  they  are 
large  enough.  But  the  fibres  have  much  the  same  appear- 
ance as  the  piece  of  wood,  and  the  fragments  of  stone, 
though  somewhat  different  from  each  other,  are  still  pieces 
of  stone.  The  question  is  still  to  be  answered,  of  what  do 
wood  and  stone  consist  ?  It  is  evident  that  some  plan  must 
be  tried  by  which  the  wood  and  stone  will  be  unbuilt,  as  it 
were,  and  by  which  they  will  yield  their  constituents. 

It  had  long  been  noticed  that  many  things  are  greatly 
changed  when  heated.  A  piece  of  wood  takes  fire  and 
burns  ;  some  kinds  of  stone  melt ;  some  metals,  such  as  lead 
and  iron,  change  into  earthy-coloured  powders.  Surely 
these  changes  ought  to  lead  to  some  knowledge  of  the 


PHLOGISTON  3 

nature  of  wood,  stone,  and  metals.  It  was  long,  however, 
before  it  was  recognised  that  the  presence  or  absence  of 
air  made  a  difference  in  the  result  of  heating  substances. 
When  attention  was  drawn  to  this  difference,  a  new  sug- 
gestion was  adopted.  It  was,  that  things,  besides  consist- 
ing of  or  sharing  the  properties  of  earth,  water,  air,  and 
fire,  also  consist  of,  or  at  least  are  like,  salt,  sulphur,  and 
mercury.  Salt  dissolves  when  put  into  water  ;  so  do  many 
other  things.  These  things  must  either  contain  a  kind  of 
salt  to  account  for  this  property;  or  they  must  at  least 
share  the  property  of  salt,  in  so  far  as  they  dissolve.  Simi- 
larly, other  things,  especially  metals,  must  either  contain  or 
share  the  property  of  mercury,  seeing  that  they  shine  with 
the  same  kind  of  lustre ;  and  many  things  resemble  sulphur 
in  so  far  as  they  burn  and  produce  a  smell  in  burning.  And 
it  was  often  imagined  that  when  things  burn,  the  sulphur  which 
they  contain  flies  away  and  disappears,  just  as  ordinary  sul- 
phur, when  set  on  fire,  burns  away  completely,  leaving  nothing 
behind.  About  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century, 
Johann  Joachim  Becher,  a  German  alchemist,  altered 
somewhat  the  conception  that  substances  contain,  or  are 
like,  salt,  sulphur,  and  mercury ;  he  imagined  all  things 
existing  on  the  surface  of  the  globe  to  contain  three  earths, 
namely  the  mercurial,  the  glassy,  and  the  fatty,  the  last 
implying  the  property  of  being  able  to  burn.  And  in. 
the  early  years  of  the  eighteenth  century,  Becher's  pupil, 
George  Ernest  Stahl,  who  was  Professor  of  Medicine  in 
Jena,  and  later  in  Halle,  two  small  German  towns,  made 
an  important  addition  to  the  ancient  theories,  namely,  that 
it  was  possible  to  restore  the  "  sulphur,"  or  the  "  fatty 
earth,"  as  Becher  called  it,  to  things  which  had  been 
deprived  of  it  by  burning,  by  heating  them  with  other 
substances  rich  in  that  constituent: 

Phlogiston. — Stahl  devised  a  new  name  for  this  com- 
bustible constituent  of  substances,  in  order  better  to  direct  at- 
tention to  his  new  idea ;  he  called  it  "  phlogiston,"  a  word 
which  may  be  translated  "burnableness,"  for  it  is  derived 


4  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

from  a  Greek  word  signifying  flame.  Thus  lead,  which 
when  heated  in  air  changes  to  an  earthy  dross,  or,  as  it 
was  then  termed,  "calx,"  may  be  restored  to  the  state  of 
metal  by  heating  it  with  charcoal  powder,  or  with  flour, 
or  with  any  substance  rich  in  "  phlogiston ;  "  that  is,  with 
any  substance  which  is  itself  capable  of  burning.  He  sup- 
posed that  the  lead  was  rich  in  "  phlogiston  ; "  that  when 
it  changed  to  lead-dross,  the  "phlogiston"  escaped;  but 
that  on  heating  with  charcoal,  the  latter  parted  with  its 
phlogiston  to  the  lead-dross,  changing  it  back  again  into 
lead.  It  is  evident  that  this  idea  accounts  for  some  of  the 
facts  observed ;  and  it  gained  ground  rapidly.  But  it  had 
been  shown  by  the  French  physician  Jean  Rey,  by  the  Eng- 
lish philosopher  Robert  Boyle,  and  others,  that  metals,  when 
they  changed  into  earthy  powders  on  heating,  gained  weight; 
and  it  is  at  least  curious  that  the  lead,  on  losing  one  of  its 
constituents,  namely  "phlogiston,"  should  gain  weight:  one 
would  have  expected  that  weight  would  be  lost,  not  gained. 
The  way  out  of  this  difficulty  was  ingenious.  We  know,  it 
was  said,  that  weight  is  due  to  the  attraction  of  the  earth ; 
now,  it  is  not  impossible  that  the  earth  may  repel  phlo- 
giston, instead  of  attracting  it;  and  in  that  case  a  body  would 
grow  heavier,  instead  of  lighter,  if  it  parts  with  phlogiston. 
Another  objection  to  the  theory  was  that  a  candle,  for 
example,  which  is  rich  in  phlogiston,  goes  out  when  made 
to  burn  under  a  glass  shade ;  that  is,  when  air  is  excluded. 
True,  said  the  phlogistonists;  that  is  because  the  phlogiston 
cannot  escape.  And  because  this  theory  gave  a  plausible 
explanation  of  the  common  phenomenon  of  combustion,  it 
was  widely  accepted,  and  survived  until  the  end  of  the 
eighteenth  century. 

The  idea  had  been  steadily  gaining  ground  that  know- 
ledge was  to  be  acquired  only  by  trial  and  failure.  Francis 
Bacon,  Lord  Verulam,  at  the  end  of  the  sixteenth  cen- 
tury wrote:  "The  true  kind  of  experience  is  not  the 
mere  groping  of  a  man  in  the  dark,  who  feels  at  random 
to  find  his  way,  instead  of  waiting  for  the  dawn  or  striking 


DISCOVERY   OF  GASES  5 

a  light.  ...  It  begins  with  an  ordered — not  chaotic — 
arrangement  of  facts,  deduces  axioms  from  these,  and  from 
the  axioms  again  designs  new  experiments."  Many  ex- 
periments were  made  on  the  action  of  heat  on  various 
things,  either  alone  or  mixed  with  others.  Boyle,  who 
introduced  the  word  "  analysis  "  to  denote  the  art  of  dis- 
covering one  substance  in  presence  of  another,  and  who 
contended  for  the  use  of  the  word  "element"  in  the  mean- 
ing of  a  constituent  of,  and  not  as  a  property  of  matter,  made 
many  such  experiments,  and  systematically  put  Bacon's  ad- 
vice into  practice.  And  so  knowledge  of  facts  gradually 
accumulated,  and  speculations  acquired  some  substantial 
basis.  To  Priestley,  a  nonconformist  clergyman  of  Bir- 
mingham, we  owe  the  discovery  of  numerous  gases,  and 
Scheele,  his  contemporary,  a  Swedish  apothecary,  also  en- 
riched chemistry  in  this  respect.  The  discovery  of  oxygen, 
in  1774?  was  made  simultaneously  by  both  of  these  illus- 
trious men.  It  had  been  generally  supposed  that  all  gases, 
or,  as  they  were  then  termed,  "airs,"  were  merely  modifi- 
cations of  atmospheric  air ;  and  it  was  not  uncommonly 
held  that  air,  in  consequence  of  its  want  of  substantiality, 
was  but  one  remove  from  nothing.  Joseph  Black,  Pro- 
fessor of  Chemistry  in  Edinburgh  in  the  middle  of  the 
eighteenth  century,  was  the  first  to  prepare  carbonic  acid 
gas,  or,  as  he  termed  it,  "fixed  air,"  in  a  pure,  state  ;  and 
by  determining  the  loss  of  weight  on  heating  its  compound 
with  magnesia,  to  show  that  it  was  due  to  the  escape  of  the 
gas ;  for  he  succeeded  also  in  absorbing  the  gas,  and  re- 
constituting the  carbonate  of  magnesia,  which  then  possessed 
practically  the  same  weight  as  it  originally  had.  In  spite 
of  this  discovery,  made  in  1756,  the  doctrine  was  still  gene- 
rally held  that  burning  substances  lost  their  constituent 
principle,  "phlogiston;  "  and  we  owe  to  the  French  che- 
mist Lavoisier  the  true  explanation  of  the  phenomenon 
of  combustion.  Lavoisier  had  been  informed  by  Priestley 
in  the  autumn  of  1774  of  his  discovery  of  what,  accord- 
ing to  the  views  then  current,  he  termed  "  dephlogisticated 


6  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

air ;  "  he  proceeded  to  repeat  an  experiment  which  had 
previously  been  made  by  Boyle,  in  heating  metallic  tin  to 
redness  in  a  sealed  glass  vessel ;  there  was  neither  gain  nor 
.  loss  of  weight,  although  the  tin  had  been  partly  converted 
into  "  calx ;  "  but  on  admitting  air,  he  observed  a  gain  in 
weight,  nearly  equal  to  that  which  the  tin  had  gained  on 
being  calcined.  The  conclusion  was  obvious,  that  the  gain 
in  weight  was  due  to  the  absorption  of  a  portion  of  the  air 
by  the  hot  tin  ;  and  he  subsequently  showed  that  the  gain 
was  to  be  ascribed  to  the  absorption  of  Priestley's  "  de- 
phlogisticated  air,"  of  which  Priestley  had  shown  common 
air  to  contain  about  one-fifth.  And  in  1777  Lavoisier 
published  the  statements: — 

1 i )  Substances  burn  only  in  pure  air. 

(2)  This  air  is  consumed  in  the  combustion,  and 
the  increase  in  weight  of  the  substance  burned  is 
equivalent  to  the  decrease  in  weight  of  the  air. 

(3)  The  combustible  body  is,  as  a  rule,  converted 
into  an  acid  by  its  combination  with  the  pure  air, 
but  the  metals,  on  the  other  hand,  are  converted  into 
"  calces." 

Oxygen. — This  last  statement  explains  the  name  which 
he  gave  to  Priestley's  and  Scheele's  gas,  namely  oxygen,  a 
word  derived  from  two  Greek  words,  signifying  "  acid- 
producer."  The  compounds  of  this  substance  he  termed 
"oxides;"  and  it  is  to  him  that  we  owe  the  system  of 
nomenclature  now  generally  in  use.  Before  the  end  of  the 
century,  the  doctrines  of  Lavoisier  had  gained  almost 
universal  acceptance. 

The  word  "  analysis,"  as  has  been  stated,  was  suggested 
by  Boyle,  to  signify  the  ascertaining  the  composition  of 
substances.  Attempts  were  made  by  him,  and  by  other 
chemists,  especially  by  Black,  to  perform  quantitative 
analyses  during  the  seventeenth  and  the  first  half  of  the 
eighteenth  centuries.  Priestley  and  Scheele  tried  to  find  the 
relative  proportions  of  oxygen  in  air  with  partial  success  ; 


COMBINING   PROPORTIONS  7 

but  it  was  not  until  Lavoisier  had  convinced  most  chemists 
that  oxygen  was  a  substance,  and  not  the  negation  of  one, 
like  the  absence  of  phlogiston,  that  serious  attention  was 
directed  to  accurate  determinations  of  quantity.  And 
towards  the  end  of  the  eighteenth  century  fairly  trustworthy 
data  began  to  accumulate. 

Combining  Proportions. — It  became  evident,  chiefly 
owing  to  the  work  of  two  German  chemists,  Wenzel  and 
Richter,  that  when  an  acid,  such  as  vitriol  or  vinegar,  is 
mixed  with  a  base,  such  as  potash,  and  neutralised,  as  the 
expression  runs — that  is,  rendered  incapable  of  changing  the 
colour  of  certain  vegetable  extracts  and  deprived  of  its  sharp 
taste — the  same  weight  of  base  was  always  required  to 
neutralise  the  same  weight  of  acid.  And  other  examples  of 
apparently  constant  proportions  between  the  constituents  of 
substances  had  also  been  observed.  But  the  processes  of 
analysis  were  very  imperfect,  and  the  results  by  no  means 
always  concordant;  and  there  was  some  ground  for  the 
statement  made  by  Count  Berthollet,  a  contemporary  of 
Lavoisier,  in  his  Researches  on  the  Laws  of  Affinity ,  published 
in  1803,  that  the  composition  of  chemical  compounds  was 
variable,  and  not  constant ;  that,  in  fact,  it  depended  on 
circumstances,  such  as  the  proportions  of  the  substances 
present,  on  the  temperature,  on  whether  the  substance  pro- 
duced was  an  insoluble  solid,  and  so  on.  Berthollet's 
statement  was  disputed  by  his  countryman  Proust,  who,  by 
fairly  accurate  analyses,  carried  out  during  eight  years  of 
controversy,  proved  the  truth  of  the  doctrine  of  constant 
proportions.  But  in  the  course  of  his  work,  he  found  that 
in  certain  cases  two  elements  form  more  than  one  compound 
with  each  other  ;  for  example,  tin  combines  with  oxygen  in 
two  proportions,  each  of  them  fixed  and  constant  ;  and  iron 
forms  similarly  two  compounds  with  sulphur.  Perhaps  the 
most  exact  experiments  which  had  at  that  time  been  made 
were  those  due  to  the  Hon.  Henry  Cavendish,  who  having 
discovered  that  water  was  composed  of  oxygen  in  union  with 
another  gas,  to  which  the  name  "  hydrogen  "  was  subse- 


8  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

quently  given,  determined  the  proportion  of  these  constituents 
with  very  great  accuracy.  He  found  that  two  volumes  of 
hydrogen  invariably  combine  with  one  volume  of  oxygen  to 
produce  water,  neither  hydrogen  nor  oxygen  being  left  over. 
Owing,  however,  to  the  method  of  expressing  the  composi- 
tion of  compounds,  no  relation  was  evident  between  the 
proportions  of  the  constituents.  Thus  Proust  expressed  the 
results  of  his  determination  of  the  composition  of  the  two 
oxides  of  tin  and  of  copper  in  parts  per  hundred  : — 

Suboxide  of   Protoxide  of  Suboxide  of    Oxide  of 
copper.  copper.  tin.  tin. 

Metal    .     .     .  86.2  80  87  78.4 

Oxygen      .     .    13.8  20  13  21.6 

1 00.0  100  100  IOO.O 

Had  he  calculated  by  simple  proportion  how  much  oxygen 
is  combined  with  the  same  weight  of  copper  and  tin  in  each 
case,  he  would  have  found  that  the  ratio  of  the  oxygen  in 
the  suboxide  of  copper  to  that  in  the  protoxide  is  as  13.8  to 
21.5  ;  and  in  the  two  oxides  of  tin  as  13  to  24.  The 
correct  figures  are  : — 

Suboxide  of    Protoxide  of  Suboxide  of    Oxide  of 
copper.          copper.  tin.  tin. 

Metal    .     .     .   88.8  79.9          88.2  78.9 

Oxygen      .     .11.2  20.1  11.8  21.1 


IOO.O  IOO.O  IOO.O  IOO.O 

The  ratio  should  be  as  I  to  2  in  each  case ;  and  the  fact 
that  Proust  did  not  remark  this  is  to  be  ascribed  partly  to  his 
method  of  stating  his  results,  and  partly  to  the  inaccuracy  of 
his  analyses. 

Attention  was  first  drawn  to  the  existence  of  simple 
proportionality  between  the  amounts  of  one  element  forming 
more  than  one  compound  with  another  by  John^Dalton,  a 
Manchester  schoolmaster,  in  1 802  and  the  next  succeeding 


DALTON'S   LAWS  9 

years.  In  the  year  named,  he  described  experiments  "  On 
the  proportion  of  the  several  gases  in  the  atmosphere  ;  "  and 
he  then  stated:  "The  elements  of  oxygen  may  combine 
with  a  certain  portion  of  nitrous  gas,  or  with  twice  that 
portion,  but  with  no  intermediate  quantity."  And  he  later 
illustrated  the  same  fact  by  considering  the  composition  of 
two  compounds  of  carbon  with  hydrogen,  marsh  gas,  and 
defiant  gas,  the  former  of  which  contains  twice  as  much 
hydrogen  as  the  latter,  proportionally  to  the  same  weight 
of  carbon. 

The  laws  relating  to  the  proportions  in  which  various 
elements  combine  are  therefore  usually  called  Dalton  s 
Laws  ;  they  are  :  — 

Dal  ton's  Laws. — The  law  of  definite  proportions  : — 
When  two  or  more  elemer^,  combine  with  each  other 
to  form  a  compound,  thc,y  combine  in  constant  pro- 
portions by  weight. 

The  law  of  multiple  proportions  : — When  two  elements 
form  more  than  one  compound  with  each  other,  they 
combine  in  simple  multiple  proportions. 

Thus,  if  A  and  B  are  definite  weights  of  two  elements, 
the  proportions  in  which  they  combine  will  be  A  with  B  ; 
or  A  with  2B  ;  or  A  with  36  ;  or  2A  with  B  ;  or  2A 
with  3^  ;  or  3 A  with  2B,  &c. 

But  Dalton  not  merely  stated  these  facts  ;  he  devised  a 
theory  with  a  view  to  explaining  them ;  he  revived  and 
gave  defmiteness  to  the  ancient  conception  that  all  substances 
which  we  see  around  us  consist  of  atoms.  This  idea  is  at 
least  as  ancient  as  400  B.C.,  and  is  to  be  found  in  the  writ- 
ings of  the  Greek  philosophers.  The  theory,  in  the  form 
which  Dalton  gave  it,  is  as  follows:  All  compounds  con- 
sist of  atoms  of  elements  united  with  each  other.  An  atom 
is  an  indivisible  (literally  "  uncuttable " )  particle,  or, 
more  correctly,  a  particle  which  resists  division.  Each 
atom  has  its  own  definite  weight ;  but  as  there  is  no  apparent 
means  of  determining  this  weight  (for  atoms  are  inconceiv- 
ably small),  we  must  be  contented  in  determining  their 


io  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

weights  relatively  to  each  other.  This  we  can  do  by 
ascertaining  the  proportion  in  which  they  exist  in  their 
compounds.  Thus,  knowing  that  water  consists  of  oxygen 
in  combination  with  hydrogen,  if  the  smallest  particle  of 
water  consists  of  one  atom  of  each  element,  the  relative 
weights  of  the  atoms  will  be  found  by  discovering  the 
proportions  by  weight  in  which  these  elements  are  combined 
with  each  other.  Now,  it  is  found  that  8  parts  by  weight 
of  oxygen  and  I  part  of  hydrogen  by  weight  combine  to 
form  9  parts  by  weight  of  water  ;  hence  an  atom  of  oxygen 
is  eight  times  as  heavy  as  an  atom  of  hydrogen ;  and  an 
atom  of  water  is  nine  times  as  heavy. 

We  must  beware  of  confusing  this  theory  with  the  facts 
on  which  it  is  founded ;  indeed,  Dalton' s  contemporaries, 
while  accepting  the  facts,  refused  in  many  cases  to  accept 
his  theory.  Sir  Humphry  Davy  used  the  word  "  propor- 
tion" in  place  of  the  word  "atom  ;  "  and  Dr.  Wollaston 
preferred  the  word  "equivalent."  And  even  granting  the 
existence  of  atoms,  the  problem  of  determining  their  relative 
weights  is  not  so  simple  as  would  at  first  sight  appear.  For 
how  is  it  possible  to  know  which  of  several  compounds  is 
the  one  containing  only  one  atom  of  each  element  ?  The 
two  compounds  of  carbon  with  hydrogen  by  means  of 
which  Dalton  illustrated  his  law  will  furnish  a  good  example 
of  this  difficulty.  While  one  of  them,  marsh-gas,  consists 
of  one  part  by  weight  of  hydrogen  in  combination  with 
three  parts  of  carbon,  the  other  consists  of  one  part  of 
hydrogen,  in  union  with  six  parts  of  carbon.  Which  of 
these  two  contains  one  atom  of  each  element  ?  If  the 
former,  then  the  atom  of  carbon  is  three  times  as  heavy  as 
the  atom  of  hydrogen  ;  if  the  latter,  it  is  six  times.  Dalton 
was  quite  aware  of  this  difficulty,  but  could  devise  no  means 
of  overcoming  it,  and  the  numbers  which  he  adopted  were 
only  provisional. 

The  difficulty  was  solved  chiefly  by  the  experimental 
work  of  Joseph  Louis  Gay-Lussac,  Professor  of  Chemistry 
in  the  Ecole  Polytechnique  in  Paris,  and  by  P.  L.  Dulong 


GAY-LUSSAC'S   LAW  TI 

and  T.  A.  Petit,  Director  of,  and  Professor  in,  the  same 
school.  The  attention  of  Gay-Lussac  having  been  directed 
by  the  celebrated  explorer  Humboldt  to  the  fact  that  water 
is  formed  by  the  union  of  one  volume  of  oxygen  with  two 
volumes  of  hydrogen  gas,  he  followed  it  up  by  the  discovery 
that  other  gases  unite  in  very  simple  proportions  by  volume. 
Of  this  we  shall  see  many  instances  hereafter. 

Gay=Lussac's  Law  of  Volumes. — Stated  in  the 
form  of  a  law,  Gay-Lussac's  discovery  was  : — The  weights 
of  equal  volumes  of  both  simple  and  compound  gases 
are  proportional  to  their  combining  weights  (or,  to 
use  Dalton' s  term,  their  atomic  weights),  or  to  rational 
multiples  of  the  latter.  This  law  appeared  as  if  it  ought 
to  have  some  simple  relation  to  Dalton's  laws  ;  but  there 
is  an  apparent  difficulty  in  reconciling  them,  which  was 
surmounted  in  1 8 1 1  by  Amadeo  Avogadro,  Professor  of 
Physics  in  Turin.  The  difficulty  is  this  : — 

Imagine  a  given  volume,  say  a  cubic  inch,  to  be  filled 
with  oxygen ;  suppose  it  to  contain  a  very  large  but  un- 
known number  of  atoms  of  oxygen,  which  we  will  call  «. 
This  oxygen,  if  mixed  with  twice  its  volume  of  hydrogen, 
or  two  cubic  inches,  and  made  to  combine  with  it  (which 
can  be  done  by  heating  the  mixture  with  an  electric 
spark),  yields  nothing  but  water  ;  and  neither  of  the  gases 
remains  uncombined  in  excess.  Let  us  suppose  that  n  atoms 
of  oxygen  combine  with  2«  atoms  of  hydrogen ;  and  as 
water  also,  according  to  Dalton,  consists  of  atoms,  there  will 
be  n  atoms  of  water  formed  by  their  union.  But  experi- 
ment shows  that  the  water,  in  the  state  of  water-gas  or 
steam,  has  a  volume  equal  to  that  of  the  hydrogen  from 
which  it  was  formed ;  that  is,  n  atoms  of  water-gas  inhabit 
a  volume  equal  to  that  inhabited  by  ^n  atoms  of  hydrogen. 
From  this  it  would  appear  that  equal  volumes  of  gases 
do  not  contain  equal  numbers  of  atoms  ;  and  while  some 
chemists  supposed,  with  Dalton,  that  water  consists  of  one 
atom  of  oxygen  in  union  with  one  atom  of  hydrogen,  others 
imagined  that  two  atoms  of  hydrogen  were  present  for  each 


12  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

atom  of  oxygen,  basing  their  conclusions  on  the  fact  that 
two  volumes  of  hydrogen  combine  with  one  volume  of 
oxygen,  and  considering  it  probable  that  equal  volumes  of 
gases  contain  equal  numbers  of  atoms.  This  last  proba- 
bility was  maintained  by  Avogadro,  and  he  defended  his 
doctrine  by  the  following  suggestion. 

Avogadro9 s Hypothesis. — Substances  consist  of  two 
kinds  of  particles,  each  of  which  has  been  termed  an  atom 
by  Dalton.  But  they  are  in  reality  different.  The  smallest 
particle,  or,  as  Avogadro  named  it,  molecule,  of  water,  con- 
sists of  three  atoms,  two  of  hydrogen  and  one  of  oxygen. 
But  hydrogen  gas  and  oxygen  gas  also  consist  of  molecules, 
each  of  them  containing  two  atoms.  The  act  of  union  of 
these  elements  is  to  be  regarded  not  as  a  case  of  combination 
of  atoms,  as  Dalton  supposed,  but  rather  as  an  exchange  of 
partners ;  the  atom  of  oxygen  leaving  the  other  atom  with 
which  it  had  been  combined,  and  uniting  with  two  atoms 
of  hydrogen,  each  of  which  had  similarly  left  its  partner. 
Thus  n  molecules  of  oxygen  exchange  partners  with  2n 
molecules  of  hydrogen,  and  form  2«  molecules  of  water-gas  ; 
but  whereas  the  molecules  of  oxygen  and  hydrogen  each 
contain  two  atoms,  those  of  water-gas  contain  three.  And 
this  explanation  is  consistent  with  the  facts ;  for  while  in 
molecules  of  hydrogen  and  n  molecules  of  oxygen,  containing 
together  6n  atoms,  react  to  form  2n  molecules  of  water- 
gas,  the  latter  also  contains  6n  atoms,  for  each  molecule  of 
water-gas  contains  three  atoms. 

Using  the  symbols  H  and  O  for  one  atom  of  hydrogen 
and  one  atom  of  oxygen  respectively,  Dalton's  idea  of  the 
combination  was — 

H  +  O-HO. 

On  the  assumption  that  equal  volumes  of  the  gases  contain 
equal  numbers  of  atoms,  the  equation  becomes — 


Lastly,  on  Avogadro' s  hypothesis,  that  the  action  is  one 


DULONG  AND   PETIT'S   LAW  13 

between  molecules  of  hydrogen  and  molecules  of  oxygen, 
each  containing  two  atoms,  the  equation  is  :  — 


Granting  Avogadro's  hypothesis,  the  relative  weights 
of  the  atoms  can  be  ascertained.  For,  as  oxygen  is 
1  6  times  as  heavy  as  hydrogen,  and  as  equal  volumes  of 
these  gases  contain  equal  numbers  of  molecules,  and  more- 
over as  each  molecule  consists  of  two  atoms,  it  follows  that 
an  atom  of  oxygen  is  16  times  as  heavy  as  an  atom  of 
hydrogen. 

Atomic  Weight.  —  This  is  usually  expressed  by  the 
phrase  —  the  atomic  weight  of  oxygen  is  16;  for  the 
atomic  weight  of  hydrogen,  being  the  smallest  known,  was 
taken  as  the  unit. 

The  relative  weight  of  a  molecule  can  also  be  calculated; 
as  an  instance,  let  us  calculate  the  molecular  weight  of 
water-gas.  Experiment  shows  that  a  given  volume  of 
water-gas  is  9  times  as  heavy  as  an  equal  volume  of  hydro- 
gen at  the  same  temperature  and  pressure  ;  again,  equal 
volumes  of  gases  contain  equal  numbers  of  molecules  ; 
therefore  a  molecule  of  water-gas  is  9  times  as  heavy  as 
a  molecule  of  hydrogen.  But  a  molecule  of  hydrogen 
consists  of  two  atoms  ;  consequently  a  molecule  of  water- 
gas  is  1  8  times  as  heavy  as  an  atom  of  hydrogen. 

Molecular  Weights.  —  This  is  usually  expressed  by- 
saying  that  the  molecular  weight  of  water  is  1  8  ;  and  inas- 
much as  it  consists  of  two  atoms  of  hydrogen  in  union  with 
one  atom  of  oxygen,  the  weight  of  a  molecule  of  water-gas 
is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  weights  of  the  atoms  composing 
it;  for,  (2  x  i)  +  16=  18. 

Dulong  and  Petit'  's  Law.  —  Let  us  now  consider 
the  discovery  of  Dulong  and  Petit,  already  alluded  to.  In 
1819  they  made  the  announcement  that  the  atoms  of 
simple  substances,  or  elements,  have  equal  capacity  for  heat. 
It  must  be  explained  that  equal  weights  of  different  sub- 
stances require  different  amounts  of  heat  to  raise  them 


i4  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

through  the  same  interval  of  temperature.  Thus,  if  the 
amount  of  heat  required  to  raise  the  temperature  of  a  gram 
of  water  from,  let  us  say,  o°  C.  to  100°  C.  be  taken  as 
unity,  it  is  found  that  only  one-ninth  of  that  amount  is 
required  to  raise  an  equal  weight  of  iron  through  the 
same  range  of  temperature.  Or,  in  other  words,  while 
the  specific  heat  of  water  is  I,  that  of  iron  is  -i,  or  in 
decimals,  0.112.  The  quantity  of  heat  necessary  to  be 
imparted  to  one  gram  of  water  to  raise  its  temperature 
through  i°  C.  is  termed  a  heat-unit,  or  calory;  but 
sometimes  the  unit  is  chosen  one  hundred  times  as  large, 
and  represents  the  heat  required  for  a  rise  of  temperature 
from  o°  to  1 00°;  and  the  French  make  use  of  a  unit 
one  thousand  times  that  of  the  smallest  unit.  Dulong 
and  Petit's^ discovery  was,  that  if  weights  of  the  solid 
elements  be  taken  proportional  to  their  atomic  weights, 
equal  amounts  of  heat  must  be  imparted  to  them  in  order 
to  raise  them  through  the  same  interval  of  temperature. 
The  following  table  illustrates  this  fact,  and  exhibits  some 
of  the  results  obtained  by  Dulong  and  Petit: — 

Element.  Atomic  weight.    Specific  heat.     Atomic  heat. 

Bismuth .      .     .  208  0.0288  6.0 

Lead       .      .      .  207  0.0293  6.0 

Gold       .      .      .  197  0.0298  5.8 

Platinum       .      .  195  0.0314  6.1 

Silver      .     .     .  108  0.0570  6.1 

Copper    ...  63  0.0952  6.0 

Iron  ....  56  0.1138  6.4 

Sulphur  ...  32  0.1776  5.7 

If  the  specific  heat  be  taken  as  the  heat  required  to  raise 
the  temperature  of  one  gram  of  each  of  these  substances 
through  one  degree,  compared  with  that  required  for  one 
gram  of  water,  the  atomic  heats  of  bismuth,  lead,  gold,  and 
the  others  represent  the  heats  required  for  208  grams  of 
bismuth,  207  grams  of  lead,  and  so  on.  It  is  evident 
that  they  are  all  nearly  equal.  It  should  follow  that  the 


EQUIVALENTS  15 

specific  heat  of  solid  hydrogen  must  be  also  6,  since  the 
atomic  weight  is  taken  as  I. 

These  facts,  though  clearly  indicating  the  numbers  which 
should  be  taken  for  the  atomic  weights  of  the  elements, 
were  neglected,  until  renewed  attention  was  called  to  them 
in  1858  by  Cannizzaro,  still  Professor  of  Chemistry  at 
Rome.  He  pointed  out  that  all  that  can  be  gained  from 
the  analysis  of  a  compound,  for  example  an  oxide,  is  the 
"equivalent"  of  the  element.  And  as  an  element,  such 
as  iron,  often  forms  more  than  one  compound  with  other 
elements,  let  us  say  oxygen  or  chlorine,  it  therefore  may 
possess  more  than  one  equivalent.  But  granting  the  atomic 
hypothesis,  its  atom  can  have  only  one  definite  weight. 
That  atomic  weight  may,  however,  be  inferred  from  its 
specific  heat,  or  from  the  density  of  its  gaseous  compounds. 
Let  us  consider  a  concrete  instance  of  each  of  these 
methods. 

The  analysis  of  two  of  the  oxides  of  iron  leads  to  the 
following  results : — 

Ferrous  oxide.          Ferric  oxide. 

Iron 77-77  70.00 

Oxygen       .      .      .      22.22  30.00 

99.99  100.00 

Equivalent. — Now,  I  gram  of  hydrogen  combines 
with  8  grams  of  oxygen  in  water  ;  and  8  is  therefore 
chosen  as  the  equivalent  of  oxygen  ;  for  the  definition  of 
an  equivalent  is  that  amount  of  an  element  which  will 
combine  with  or  replace  one  part  by  weight  of 
hydrogen.  In  ferrous  oxide,  since  22.22  grams  of 
oxygen  combine  with  77.77  grams  of  iron,  8  grams  of 

77.77  X  8 

oxygen  will  combine  with  =28  grams  of  iron; 

and  in  ferric  oxide,  8  grams  of  oxygen  are  in  combination 

with  =18.66  grams  of  iron.      Thus  the  equivalent 

j 


16  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

of  iron  in  ferrous  oxide  is  28,  and  in  ferric  oxide  18.66. 
The  question  now  arises,  What;  is  the  atomic  weight  of 
iron  ?  We  have  seen  that  the  specific  heat  of  iron  is 
0.1138;  and  we  know  that  the  specific  heat  of  solid 
hydrogen  is  probably  6.  And  as  the  specific  heats  of 
elements  are  inversely  as  their  atomic  weights,  we  have 
the  proportion — 

Specific  heat  Specific  heat      Atomic  weight      Atomic  weight 

of  iron.  of  hydrogen.        of  hydrogen.  of  iron. 

o.i  138          :  6          :  :  i  :          52.7 

The  number  52.7  is  nearly  2  x  28,  and  nearly  3  x  18.66  ; 
these  products  give  56  ;  and  it  must  be  remembered  that 
Dulong  and  Petit's  law  is  not  absolute,  but  merely  an 
approximation  ;  hence  56  is  accepted  as  the  true  atomic 
weight  of  iron. 

The  element  sulphur  forms  a  compound  with  hydrogen 
which  has  the  following  composition  : — 

Sulphur 94.12  per  cent. 

Hydrogen 5.87        „ 

100.00 

The  gas  is  17.1  times  as  heavy  as  hydrogen;  and  this 
means  that  a  molecule  of  hydrogen  sulphide  is  17.1  times 
as  heavy  as  a  molecule  of  hydrogen.  But  a  molecule  of 
hydrogen  is  believed  to  consist  of  two  atoms  ;  hence  a 
molecule  of  hydrogen  sulphide  is  34.2  times  as  heavy  as  an 
atom  of  hydrogen.  Now,  if  this  gas  consists  of  one  atom 
of  hydrogen  in  combination  with  one  atom  of  sulphur,  then 
the  atomic  weight  of  sulphur  will  be  the  same  as  its  equiva- 
lent, viz.,  -  ^=16;  but  if  it  contain  two  atoms  of 
ij.oo 

hydrogen,    then    the    atomic    weight    of    sulphur    will    be 

x-~— --  =32.      The  first  hypothesis  is  impossible,  for  then 

the    molecular    weight    of    hydrogen    sulphide    would    be 


ISOMORPHISM  17 

16+  i  =  17  ;  whereas,  it  has  been  found  to  equal  34.2  ; 
but  if  two  atoms  of  hydrogen  are  present  in  sulphide  of 
hydrogen,  the  molecular  weight  is  32  +  2  =  34  ;  and  this  is 
nearly  the  same  as  the  number  found,  viz.,  34.2.  It  is, 
however,  still  possible  that  hydrogen  sulphide  consists  of  two 
atoms  of  hydrogen  in  union  with  two  atoms  of  sulphur,  in 
which  case  the  atomic  weight  of  sulphur  might  still  be  16  ; 
but  many  other  gaseous  or  gasifiable  compounds  of  sulphur 
are  known,  and  in  none  of  them  is  the  molecular  weight 
such  that  they  could  be  supposed  to  contain  less  than  32 
parts  of  sulphur  for  each  part  of  hydrogen,  or  its  equivalent 
of  another  element.  It  is  consequently  regarded  as  impro- 
bable that  the  atomic  weight  of  sulphur  is  less  than  32  ;  and 
that  32  is  the  correct  number  follows  also  from  the  deter- 
mination of  its  specific  heat. 

Isomorphism.  —  A  third  method  of  arriving  at  the 
correct  atomic  weight  of  an  element  was  suggested  in  1819 
by  Billiard  Mitscherlicll,  then  Professor  in  Berlin.  When 
two  substances  crystallise  in  the  same  crystalline  form, 
they  are  said  to  be  «« isomorphous  "  with  each  other.  It  is 
often  the  case  that  such  compounds  are  similar  chemically  ; 
that  is,  they  may  contain  the  same  number  of  atoms,  and 
may  also  closely  resemble  each  other  physically.  Thus, 
there  is  a  large  class  of  compounds,  named  "  alums,"  which 
are  sulphates  of  two  metals.  Ordinary  alum  is  a  sulphate 
of  aluminium  and  potassium  ;  it  crystallises  in  eight-sided 
regular  figures,  termed  "octahedra."  When  the  rare  metal 
gallium  was  discovered,  it  was  found  to  form  an  "alum  ;  " 
it  gave  a  sulphate  of  gallium  and  potassium,  crystallising  in 
octahedra,  and  similar  in  properties  to  ordinary  alum.  Now, 
Mitscherlich's  statement  was,  that  when  one  element  takes 
the  place  of  another  in  an  isomorphous  crystal  of  the  same 
chemical  character,  the  substitution  occurs  so  that  one  atom 
of  the  one  replaces  one  atom  of  the  other,  Hence,  if  the 
atomic  weight  of  the  one  element  is  known,  the  weight  of 
the  other  element  which  replaces  it  will  be  proportional  to 
its  atomic  weight.  In  the  case  above  mentioned,  it  was 


i8  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

found  that  27.1  parts  by  weight  of  aluminium  were  replaced 
by  69.9  parts  of  gallium  ;  and  as  it  was  known  from  experi- 
ments such  as  those  previously  described  that  the  atomic 
weight  of  aluminium  is  27.1,  it  follows  that  69.9  is  the 
atomic  weight  of  gallium.  But  care  is  necessary  in  using 
this  indication  of  the  atomic  weight  ;  for  it  may  happen  that 
two  compounds  may  contain  the  same  number  of  elements  in 
the  same  proportions,  and  have  a  similar  crystalline  form ; 
and  yet  Mitscherlich's  law  may  not  be  applicable. 


CHAPTER  II 

Gaseous  and  Osmotic  Pressure — Boyle's,  Gay" 
Lussac's,  Pfeffer's,  and  Raoult's  Laws. 

IF  we  grant,  in  accordance  with  modern  views,  that  matter 
consists  of  minute  particles,  termed  molecules,  it  must  also 
be  allowed  that  the  distance  between  these  ultimate  particles 
must  be  very  different,  according  to  whether  the  matter  is 
in  the  solid,  or  liquid,  or  in  the  gaseous  state.  Thus,  a 
cubic  centimeter  of  water  at  100°  expands,  when  it  is 
boiled  into  steam  of  the  same  temperature,  to  1700  cubic 
centimeters;  and  a  cubic  centimeter  of  oxygen,  measured 
at  its  boiling-point,  -182°,  boils  into  266  cubic  centimeters 
of  oxygen  gas  of  the  same  temperature.  In  changing  its 
state,  therefore,  from  liquid  or  solid  to  gas,  matter  under- 
goes a  great  alteration  of  volume.  It  is  accordingly  to  be 
expected  that  the  molecules  of  a  gas,  being  at  so  much 
greater  a  distance  from  each  other  than  the  molecules  of  a 
solid  or  liquid,  should  yield  more  readily  to  pressure,  and 
should  decrease  in  volume  when  the  pressure  is  raised, 
much  more  than  solids  or  liquids.  It  is  also  found,  as 
appeared  probable,  that  the  expansion  of  a  gas  is  much 
greater  than  that  of  a  solid  or  a  liquid,  by  a  definite  rise 
of  temperature. 

Boyle's  Law. — The  law  relating  to  the  compres- 
sibility of  gases  was  discovered  by  Boyle.  It  is,  that  if 
temperature  be  kept  constant,  the  volume  of  all  gases 
is  inversely  as  the  pressure.  Thus,  if  the  pressure  of  the 
atmosphere,  which  is  equal  to  1033  grams  on  each  square 
19 


20  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

centimeter  of  the  earth's  surface  at  sea-level,  or  approxi- 
mately i  5  Ibs.  on  each  square  inch,  be  doubled,  the  volume 
of  a  given  weight  of  air,  or  of  any  other  gas,  will  be  halved  ; 
on  trebling  the  pressure  the  volume  is  reduced  to  one-third, 
and  so  on.  As  the  length  of  a  column  of  mercury,  one 
square  centimeter  in  cross-section,  must  be  76  centimeters 
in  order  that  its  weight  shall  be  1033  grams,  76  centi- 
meters is  taken  as  the  "  normal  "  height  of  the  barometer. 
And  if  the  height  of  the  mercury  in  a  gauge  or  "  mano- 
meter" is  152  centimeters,  the  pressure  which  produces 
that  rise  in  the  mercurial  column  will  halve  the  volume 
of  a  gas  exposed  to  it. 

Gay*Lussac's  Law.  —  The  law  connecting  the 
volume  of  a  gas  with  the  temperature  was  discovered  by 
Gay-Lussac,  and  independently  by  Dalton;  but  it  is  gene- 
rally attributed  to  the  former  chemist.  It  is  : — Provided 
pressure  be  kept  constant,  the  volume  of  a  gas,  mea- 
sured at  0°  C.,  increases  by  ^4^,  f°r  eac^-  rise  °f  1°- 
Or  i  volume  of  gas  at  o°  will  become  1.00367  volume  at 
i°;  1.0367  volume  at  10° ;  1.367  volume  at  100°,  and 
so  on.  Generally  stated,  if  /  stand  for  a  temperature,  i 
volume  of  gas  will  become  i  -f  O.OO367/  when  heated  from 
o°  to  that  temperature. 

A  third  law  may  be  deduced  from  these  two ;  it  is, 
that  if  the  volume  of  a  gas  be  kept  constant,  the 
pressure  of  a  gas  will  increase  ¥1^  of  its  initial 
value  at  0°  for  each  rise  of  1°.  This  is  evident  from 
the  following  consideration : — Suppose  that  i  volume  of 
a  gas  is  heated  from  o°  to  i°;  the  volume  will  increase 
to  1.00367  volume.  To  reduce  the  volume  again  to  its 
initial  value,  i,  the  pressure  must  be  raised  by  0.00367 
of  its  original  amount.  If  the  initial  pressure  corresponded 
to  that  of  76  centimeters  of  mercury,  it  would  have  to 
be  increased  to  76  +  (76  x  0.00367)  centimeters,  or  to 
76.279  centimeters  in  order  that  the  gas  should  resume 
its  original  volume  of  I.  The  same  consideration  will 
hold  if  the  gas  is  cooled  instead  of  being  heated ;  but 


DIFFUSION  21 

of  course  in  that  case  the  pressure  will  be  reduced,  in- 
stead of  being  raised.  It  follows  from  this,  that  if  the 
temperature  could  be  reduced  to  273  below  o°  C.,  the 
gas  would  exert  no  pressure.  This  temperature,  —  273°, 
is  termed  "  absolute  zero."  As  a  matter  of  fact,  so  low 
a  temperature  has  never  been  reached ;  and,  moreover,  it  is 
certain  that  all  gases  would  change  to  liquids  before  that 
temperature  was  attained.  But  it  serves  as  the  starting- 
point  for  what  is  termed  the  "absolute  scale  of  tempera- 
ture." Gay-Lussac's  law  may  therefore  be  stated  thus: — 
The  volume  of  a  gas  at  constant  pressure  increases 
as  the  absolute  temperature  ;  and  its  corollary,  thus : — 
The  pressure  of  a  gas  at  constant  volume  increases 
as  the  absolute  temperature.  For  o°  C.  corresponds 
with  273°  on  the  absolute  scale;  and  273  volumes  of  gas 
will  become  274,  if  the  temperature  is  raised  from  273° 
absolute  to  274°  absolute.  Similarly,  the  pressure  of  a  gas 
will  increase  in  the  proportion  273  :  274  if  the  absolute 
temperature  is  increased  from  273°  to  274°. 

Pressure  Proved  by  Diffusion. — When  a  solid 
is  dissolved  in  a  liquid,  as,  for  example,  sugar  in  water,  the 
particles  of  sugar — 'its  molecules  —  must  obviously  be 
separated  from  each  other  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  ac- 
cording as  much  or  little  water  be  added.  And  it.  has 
been  noticed  that  if  the  sugar  be  placed  in  the  water,  and 
not  stirred  up,  the  sugar  will  dissolve  at  the  bottom  of  the 
vessel,  and  the  strong  solution  of  sugar  will  slowly  mix  up 
with  the  upper  layer  of  water,  and  in  course  of  time  be 
equally  distributed  through  the  water ;  just  as  a  heavy  gas, 
such  as  carbonic  acid  gas,  if  placed  in  an  open  jar,  will 
gradually  escape  into  the  lighter  air  above  it.  This  pro- 
cess of  mixing  of  two  liquids  or  gases  is  termed  "diffusion." 
It  is  now  generally  held  that  the  pressure  of  a  gas  on  the 
walls  of  the  vessel  which  contains  it  is  produced  by  the 
impacts  of  its  molecules  against  the  walls ;  and  as  the 
molecules  are  extremely  numerous,  and  in  a  state  of  very 
rapid  motion,  they  escape  from  an  open  vessel  ;  so  that 


22  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

even  a  heavy  gas,  like  carbon  dioxide,  will  escape  upwards 
into  a  lighter  gas ;  and  similarly,  a  light  gas,  like  hydro- 
gen, will  escape  downwards  into  a  heavy  gas,  owing  to  the 
unceasing  motion  of  its  molecules.  The  fact  that  the 
molecules  of  sugar,  which,  by  the  way,  becomes  itself  a 
liquid  when  dissolved  in  water,  travel  upwards,  and  diffuse 
through  the  lighter  water,  shows  that  they  too  are  in 
motion ;  but  the  slowness  of  the  diffusion,  compared  with 
the  rate  of  diffusion  of  a  gas,  indicates  that  their  motion 
is  much  impeded  by  the  molecules  of  water,  with  which 
they  are  constantly  coming  into  collision.  And  just  as  the 
motion  of  the  molecules  of  a  gas  produces  pressure,  and 
causes  the  gas  to  escape  through  an  opening,  so  the  motion 
of  the  molecules  of  sugar,  which  causes  them  to  rise  through 
water  against  the  attraction  of  the  earth,  may  be  taken  to 
imply  that  they  also  exert  a  kind  of  pressure.  But  the 
molecules  of  water,  with  which  the  molecules  of  sugar  are 
mixing,  must  also  be  held  to  exert  pressure  of  the  same 
kind,  since  they  disperse  themselves  through  the  molecules 
of  sugar.  How  is  it  possible  to  distinguish  the  pressure  due 
to  the  sugar  from  that  due  to  the  water  ?  A  parallel  case 
with  gases  will  help  us  to  reply  to  this  question. 

Dalton's  Law  of  Partial  Pressures. — Suppose  a 
vessel  of  one  litre  capacity  to  be  filled  with  oxygen  gas  at 
o°,  and  under  the  atmospheric  pressure  of  76  centimeters  of 
mercury.  The  oxygen  will  exert  pressure  on  its  walls 
equal  to  that  of  the  atmosphere,  for  the  vessel  may  be 
placed  in  communication  with  the  atmosphere,  in  order  to 
equalise  pressure,  before  it  is  closed.  Now  let  half  a  litre 
of  hydrogen  be  introduced  by  means  of  a  force-pump.  As 
temperature  and  volume  remain  the  same,  the  pressure  will 
be  increased  to  76  cms.  +  38  cms.  Introduce  another  half- 
litre  of  hydrogen,  and  the  initial  pressure  will  be  doubled;  it 
will  now  be  152  cms.  Let  another  litre  of  hydrogen  be 
introduced,  and  the  initial  pressure  will  be  trebled.  We 
might  introduce  a  third  gas,  say  nitrogen,  into  the  vessel,  and 
the  pressure  would  be  increased  proportionately  to  the  quan- 


LAW  OF   PARTIAL   PRESSURES  23 

tity  introduced.  Each  constituent  of  the  gaseous  mixture, 
accordingly,  exerts  pressure  on  the  walls  of  the  containing 
vessel  proportionally  to  its  relative  amount.  For  example, 
the  pressure  of  the  nitrogen  of  the  oxygen  and  of  the  argon 
in  air  is  proportional  in  each  case  to  the  amounts  of  these 
constituents,  viz.,  oxygen,  about  21  per  cent.  ;  nitrogen,  78 
per  cent.  ;  and  argon,  i  per  cent.  This  statement  is  known 
as  Dalton's  law  of  partial  pressures.  If  the  pressure  of 
the  air  is  76  cms.,  that  of  the  nitrogen  is  y7^  x  76  ;  of  the 
oxygen,  — --  x  76  ;  and  of  the  argon,  —^  x  76  cms.  In  the 
case  of  liquids,  however,  such  a  method  fails.  For  while 
in  some  instances  the  volume  of  a  solution  is  nearly  equal  to 
that  of  the  solvent,  plus  that  of  the  dissolved  substance,  in 
others  the  volume  is  less,  and  in  a  few  instances  greater. 

A  device  has,  however,  been  discovered,  by  which  it  is 
possible  to  measure  the  partial  pressure  of  the  dissolved  sub- 
stance ;  and  again  an  example  will  first  be  given  from  the 
behaviour  of  gases.  The  rare  metal  palladium  is  permeable 
at  high  temperatures  by  hydrogen,  but  not  by  other  gases. 
Now,  if  a  vessel  made  of  palladium  be  filled  with  a  gas  that 
cannot  escape  through  its  walls — for  example,  with  nitrogen 
at  atmospheric  pressure — equal  to  that  of  76  cms.  of  mercury 
— and  at  a  high  temperature,  say  300°  C.  ;  and  if  it  be 
then  surrounded  with  hydrogen  gas,  also  at  atmospheric 
pressure,  the  pressure  of  the  gases  in  the  interior  of  the 
vessel  will  rise  to  two  atmospheres,  owing  to  the  entry  of 
hydrogen  through  the  walls,  which  are  permeable  to  that  gas 
alone.  The  mercury  in  the  gauge  connected  with  the 
palladium  vessel  will  rise,  until  it  stands  at  a  height  of  76  cms., 
showing  that  the  original  atmospheric  pressure  has  been 
doubled.  As  there  is  no  opposition  to  the  passage  of  the 
hydrogen  inwards  or  outwards  through  the  walls  of  the 
vessel,  hydrogen  will  enter  until  the  pressure  of  the  hydrogen 
in  the  interior  is  equal  to  that  on  the  exterior  of  the  vessel. 
But  the  nitrogen  cannot  escape,  hence  it  exerts  its  original 
pressure  of  76  cms.  of  mercury. 

Osmotic  Pressure. — The  partial  pressure  of  the  dis- 


24  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

solved  substance  in  a  solution  has  been  measured  by  a  similar 
plan,  devised  by  the  German  botanist  Pfeffer.  It  was 
necessary  for  this  purpose  to  discover  a  "  semi-permeable 
membrane,"  through  the  pores  of  which  water  could  pass 
freely,  but  which  would  be  impermeable  to  the  dissolved 
substance.  A  slimy  precipitate,  produced  by  adding 
potassium  ferrocyanide  to  copper  sulphate,  is  not  permeated 
by  dissolved  sugar,  though  water  freely  penetrates  it.  But  a 
diaphragm  of  this  nature  is  far  too  tender  to  withstand  any 
pressure.  Pfeffer  succeeded  in  depositing  the  slimy  ferro- 
cyanide of  copper  in  the  interior  of  the  walls  of  a  pot  of 
porous  unglazed  earthenware,  and  so  constructing  a  vessel 
which  could  be  closed  with  a  glass  stopper,  with  the  help  of 
cement.  The  stopper,  which  was  hollow,  was  placed  in 
connection  with  a  gauge  containing  mercury ;  and  after  the 
pot  and  stopper  had  been  filled  with  a  solution  of  sugar,  the 
stopper  was  connected  with  the  gauge,  which  thus  registered 
the  pressure  upon,  and  consequently  exerted  by,  the  liquid. 
The  pot  was  then  immersed  in  a  large  vessel  of  water,  which 
could  be  heated  to  any  desired  temperature,  not  too  high  to 
soften  the  cement.  It  was  found  that  the  water  slowly 
entered  the  pot,  and  consequently  raised  the  mercury  in  the 
gauge  ;  but  after  a  certain  quantity  had  entered,  the  ingress  of 
water  stopped,  and  the  pressure  ceased  to  rise. 

The  pressure  thus  raised  has  been  termed  "  osmotic 
pressure."  The  numbers  which  follow  were  obtained  by 
PfefFer  :— 

Concentration.  Pressure.  Ratio. 

1  percent.  53.5  cms.  53.5 

2  „      „  101.6     „  50.8 

4       99  99  2°8'2         99  52'1 

6   „     „  3°7-5     99  5l-$ 

When  a  gas  occupying  a  certain  volume  is  increased  in 
quantity  by  pumping  in  an  equal  volume  of  gas,  it  is  clear 
that  the  number  of  molecules  in  the  volume  is  doubled  ; 
and  experiment  shows  that,  in  accordance  with  Boyle's  law, 


OSMOTIC   PRESSURE  25 

the  pressure  is  doubled.  The  concentration  of  a  solution 
is  expressed  by  the  weight  of  dissolved  substance  in  100 
parts  of  the  solution  ;  and  it  is  evident  from  PfefFer's 
numbers  that,  on  doubling  the  number  of  molecules  of 
sugar  in  a  given  volume  of  the  solution,  the  osmotic 
pressure  is  also  doubled.  The  osmotic  pressure,  in  fact, 
increases  directly  as  the  concentration,  exactly  as  with 
gases. 

PfefTer  also  made  experiments  at  different  temperatures. 
Owing  to  the  softening  of  the  cement  with  which  the  semi- 
permeable  pot  was  closed,  he  was  not  able  to  use  high 
temperatures  ;  but  some  of  his  results  are  given  below  :  — 


Temperature     Temperature 
C.                        Abs. 

Pressure. 

Pressure 
Calculated. 

J5-50 

•  273   =   287.2° 
„     =   288.5° 

51.0  cms. 
52.1     „ 

51.0  cms. 
51.2     „ 

32.0° 
36.0° 

„     -    3°5-°° 
„     =    309.0° 

54-4     » 
56-7    „ 

54-1     » 

54-9         99 

The  results  are  meagre,  but,  so  far  as  they  go,  in  reasonably 
good  accord.  Experiments  of  this  kind  have  seldom  been 
made,  owing  to  the  difficulty  in  preparing  satisfactory 
membranes.  The  calculation  has  been  made  on  the  assump- 
tion that  the  osmotic  pressure,  like  the  gaseous  pressure, 
increases  directly  as  the  absolute  temperature. 

A  striking  proof  of  the  correctness  of  the  analogy 
between  osmotic  and  gaseous  pressure  is  derived  from  the 
following  consideration  :  A  gram  of  oxygen  gas,  measured 
at  o°  C.  and  76  cms.  pressure,  has  been  found  to  occupy 
699.4  cc.  ;  now,  32  grams  of  oxygen  form  a  gram- 
molecule,  for  the  atomic  weight  of  oxygen  is  16,  and 
there  are  two  atoms  of  oxygen  in  a  molecule  of  the  gas, 
as  we  have  seen  on  p.  13.  The  volume  of  32  grams  is 
accordingly  699.4x32  =  22,380  cc.  The  simplest  for- 
mula for  cane-sugar  is  C12H22On,  and  as  the  atomic 
weight  of  carbon  is  12,  the  molecular  v/eight  of  sugar  is 
at  least  (12  x  12)  +  (22  x  i)  +  (  1  1  x  16)  =  342.  If  it 


26  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

were  possible  for  cane-sugar  to  exist  in  the  state  of  gas,  it 
might  be  expected  that  342  grams  in  22,380  cc.  would 
exert  the  same  pressure  as  32  grams  of  oxygen,  viz., 
76  cms.,  since  342  grams  of  sugar  are  likely  to  contain 
as  many  molecules  as  32  grams  of  oxygen.  But  sugar 
chars  when  heated,  and  decomposes.  However,  it  is 
possible  to  calculate,  by  means  of  Boyle's  and  Gay- 
Lussac's  laws,  the  pressure  which  a  i1  per  cent,  solution 
of  sugar  ought  to  exert  at  14.2°  C.  If  there  were 
223.8  grams  in  22,380  cc.,  the  solution  would  be  one 
of  I  per  cent.  And  the  pressure  which  it  should  exert 

22 3   8 

would  be  x  76,  or   51.66  cms.   at  o°  C.,  or   273° 

Abs.  And  at  14.2°  C.,  or  287.2°  Abs.,  this  pressure 
should  be  increased  in  the  proportion  273  :  287.2  ;  giving 
a  theoretical  pressure  of  52.5  cms.;  the  actual  pressure 
measured  was  51  cms. — a  fairly  close  approximation.  It 
may,  therefore,  be  taken  that  sugar  in  solution  in  water 
exerts  the  same  osmotic  pressure  on  the  walls  of  a  semi- 
permeable  vessel,  as  the  same  number  of  molecules  would 
do,  if  it  were  in  the  state  of  gas,  occupying  the  same 
volume,  and  at  the  same  temperature. 

Experiments  with  semi-permeable  diaphragms  arc  very 
difficult ;  the  diaphragm  seldom  receives  sufficient  support 
from  the  pipe-clay  walls  of  the  pot,  and  is  usually  torn 
when  the  pressure  rises  to  even  a  very  moderate  degree. 
But  it  is  not  necessary  to  attempt  such  measurements ;  for 
the  Dutch  chemist,  J.  H.  van't  Hoff,  now  Professor  of 
Physical  Chemistry  in  Berlin,  pointed  out  in  1887  that 
very  simple  relations  exist  between  the  osmotic  pressure  of 
solutions  and  the  lowering  of  the  freezing-point  of  the 
solvent,  due  to  the  presence  of  the  dissolved  substance, 
and  also  the  rise  of  boiling-point  of  the  solvent,  produced 
by  the  same  cause.  A  proof  of  this  connection  will  not  be 
attempted  here,  but  the  facts  may  be  shortly  stated. 

Measurement  of  Osmotic  Pressure  by  Lower* 
ins  of  Freezing=point. — All  pure  substances  have  a 


DEPRESSION   OF   FREEZING-POINT         27 

perfectly  definite  melting-point ;  thus,  ice  melts  at  o°  C., 
sulphur  at  120°,  tin  at  226°,  lead  at  325°,  and  so  on. 
These  temperatures  are  also  the  freezing-points  of  the 
liquids,  provided  some  of  the  solid  substance  is  present. 
If  this  is  not  the  case,  then  it  is  possible  to  cool  the  liquid 
below  its  freezing-point  without  its  turning  solid.  Accord- 
ingly, water  freezes  at  o°  if  there  is  a  trace  of  ice  present ; 
melted  tin  solidifies  at  226°  if  there  is  a  trace  of  solid  tin 
added  to  the  cooled  liquid ;  and  if,  for  example,  water  be 
cooled  without  the  presence  of  ice,  until  it  has  a  tempera- 
ture lower  than  o°,  say  0.5°  below  o°,  on  addition  of  a 
spicule  of  ice  a  number  of  little  crystals  of  ice  begin  to 
form  in  the  liquid  and  the  temperature  rises  to  o°.  But 
if  there  is  some  substance  dissolved  in  the  liquid,  as,  for 
example,  sugar  in  the  water  or  lead  in  the  tin,  then  the 
freezing-point  is  lowered  below  that  of  the  pure  substance. 
And  when  the  solvent  freezes,  in  general  the  solid  consists 
of  the  solid  solvent,  none  of  the  dissolved  substance  crystal- 
lising out  with  it.  It  is  owing  to  this  fact  that  travellers  in 
Arctic  regions  manage  to  get  water  to  drink ;  for  the  ice 
from  salt  water  is  fresh,  and  when  melted  yields  fresh  water. 
It  has  been  observed  that  with  the  same  solvent  the 
freezing-point  is  lowered  proportionally  to  the  amount  of 
dissolved  substance  present,  provided  the  solution  is  a 
dilute  one.  Thus,  a  solution  of  cane-sugar  in  water, 
containing  3.42  grams  of  sugar  in  100  grams  of  the 
solution,  froze  at  0.185°  below  zero;  and  one  contain- 
ing half  that  quantity,  1.71  grams,  froze  at  0.092°  below 
zero.  Again,  the  same  lowering  of  the  freezing-point  is 
produced  by  quantities  proportional  to  the  molecular 
weights  of  the  dissolved  substances.  Malic  acid,  an  acid 
contained  in  sour  apples,  has  the  molecular  weight  134, 
while  it  will  be  remembered  that  the  molecular  weight  of 
cane-sugar  is  342.  Now,  a  solution  of  1.34  grams  of 
malic  acid  in  water,  made  up  with  water  so  that  the  whole 
solution  weighed  100  grams,  froze  at  0.187°  below  zero,  a 
number  almost  identical  with  that  found  for  sugar. 


28  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

Solvents  other  than  water  may  also  be  used ;  but  in 
that  case  the  lowering  of  the  freezing-point  is  different. 
Acetic  acid,  which  is  vinegar  free  from  water,  is  often 
employed ;  so  also  is  benzene,  a  compound  separated  from 
coal-tar,  produced  in  the  manufacture  of  coal-gas.  The 
freezing-point  of  acetic  acid  is  17°;  that  of  benzene  is 
4.9°.  It  was  found  in  1884  by  Raoult,  Professor  of 
Chemistry  in  Grenoble  in  the  South  of  France,  that  while 
1.52  grams  of  camphor  (the  hundredth  part  of  its  mole- 
cular weight)  dissolved  in  benzene  (100  grams  of  solution) 
lowered  the  freezing-point  of  the  benzene  by  0.514°,  the 
same  quantity  of  camphor,  forming  a  solution  in  acetic  acid 
of  the  same  strength,  lowered  the  freezing-point  of  the 
latter  by  0.39°.  And  he  also  noticed  that  the  lowering  of 
the  freezing-point  is  proportional,  at  least  in  some  cases,  to 
the  molecular  weights  of  the  solvents.  Thus,  the  mole- 
cular weights  of  acetic  acid  and  benzene  are  respectively 
60  and  78;  and  as  0.39  :  0.514  :  :  60  :  79,  the  pro- 
portionality is  very  nearly  exact. 

It  is  possible  by  this  means  to  determine  the  molecular 
weight  of  any  substance  which  will  dissolve  in  any  solvent 
for  which  the  depression  produced  in  the  freezing-point  is 
known.  Thus,  for  example,  Beckmann,  the  deviser  of 
the  apparatus  with  which  such  determinations  are  made, 
found  that  a  solution  of  naphthalene,  a  white  compound  of 
carbon  and  hydrogen  contained  in  coal-tar,  in  benzene,  the 
solution  containing  0.452  per  cent,  of  naphthalene,  lowered 
the  freezing-point  of  benzene  by  0.140°.  A  I  per  cent, 
solution  would  therefore  cause  a  lowering  of  0.309°.  And 
as  0.309  :  0.39  ::  100  :  126,  this  is  therefore  the  molecular 
weight  of  naphthalene.  The  simplest  formula  for  naphtha- 
lene is  C5H4,  for  its  percentage  composition  is  carbon, 
93.75,  hydrogen,  6.25;  and  to  find  the  relative  number 
of  atoms,  the  percentage  of  carbon  must  be  divided  by  the 
atomic  weight  of  carbon,  and  that  of  hydrogen  by  its  atomic 

weight,  thus  : — 25^75  =  7.81,  and  _— 5  =  6.25  ;   and  these 


RISE  OF   BOILING-POINT  29 

numbers  are  to  each  other  in  the  proportion  5  :  4.  But 
a  substance  with  the  formula  C5H4  must  have  the  molecular 
weight  (5x  12)  +  (4  x  i)=64;  whereas  the  molecular 
weight  found  is  126.  Now,  126  is  nearly  twice  64; 
hence  the  formula  of  naphthalene  must  be  C10Hg.  The 
method  is  not  exact,  but  it  affords  evidence  which,  taken 
in  conjunction  with  the  analysis  of  the  compound,  enables 
the  molecular  weight  to  be  determined. 

Measurement  of  Osmotic  Pressure  by  Rise 
of  Boiling=point. — A  method  for  determining  the  mole- 
cular weights  of  substances  by  the  rise  of  boiling-point  of 
their  solutions  was  also  devised  by  Beckmann,  and  it  is 
frequently  used.  The  process  is  analogous  to  that  in 
which  the  depression  of  freezing-point  is  made  use  of. 
Every  pure  substance  has  a  perfectly  definite  boiling-point, 
provided  that  pressure  is  constant ;  but  if  any  substance  is 
dissolved  in  a  pure  liquid,  the  boiling-point  of  the  latter 
is  raised ;  and  it  is  found  that  the  rise  of  boiling-point  is 
proportional  to  the  number  of  molecules  of  the  dissolved 
substance  present.  As  an  example,  let  us  calculate  the 
molecular  weight  of  iodine  dissolved  in  ether  from  the 
rise  in  the  boiling-point  of  the  ether.  The  rise  caused  by 
the  hundredth  part  of  the  molecular  weight  of  a  substance 
taken  in  grams,  and  dissolved  in  100  grams  of  ether,  is 
0.2105°.  Now,  Beckmann  found  that  1.513  grams  of  iodine 
dissolved  in  100  grams  of  ether  raised  the  boiling-point 
of  the  ether  by  0.126°.  And  to  raise  the  boiling-point  by 
0.2105°,  2.53  grams  of  iodine  would  have  been  necessary; 
2.53  is  therefore  the  hundredth  part  of  the  molecular 
weight  of  iodine.  It  is  possible  to  weigh  iodine  in  the 
state  of  gas,  for  it  is  an  easily  volatilised  element ;  and  its 
vapour  has  been  found  to  be  126  times  as  heavy  as  hydro- 
gen. We  have  seen  that  this  statement  implies  that  a 
molecule  of  iodine  gas  is  126  times  as  heavy  as  a  molecule 
of  hydrogen  gas  ;  and  as  a  molecule  of  hydrogen  consists 
of  two  atoms,  a  molecule  of  iodine  gas  is  252  times  as 
heavy  as  an  atom  of  hydrogen,  or  its  molecular  weight 


30  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

is  252.  The  number  obtained  from  the  density  of  the  gas 
is  accordingly  almost  identical  with  that  obtained  from  the 
rise  in  the  boiling-point  of  ether. 

We  have  now  studied  four  methods  by  means  of  which 
the  molecular  weights  of  elements  and  compounds  have 
been  ascertained  ;  they  are  : — 

1 I )  By  determining  the  density  of  the  substance  in  the 
state  of  gas  with  reference  to  hydrogen,  and  doubling  the 
number  obtained ;  for  molecular  weights  are  referred  to  the 
weight  of  an   atom  of  hydrogen,  while  a  molecule,  it  is 
believed,  consists  of  two  atoms. 

(2)  By  measuring  the  osmotic   pressure   exerted   by  a 
solution  of  the  substance,  and  comparing  the  pressure  with 
that  exerted  by  an  equal  number  of  molecules  of  hydrogen, 
occupying  the  same  volume,  at  the  same  temperature. 

(  3 )  By  comparing  the  depression  in  freezing-point  of  a 
solvent  containing  the  substance  in  solution,  with  the  de- 
pression produced  by  the  hundredth  part  of  the  molecular 
weight  in  grams  of  a  substance  of  which  the  molecular 
weight  is  known,  and  by  then  making  use  of  the  known 
fact  that  equal  numbers  of  molecules  produce  equal  depres- 
sion in  the  freezing-point  of  a  solvent. 

(4)  By  a  similar  method  applied  to  the  rise  in  boiling- 
point  of  a  solvent  caused  by  the  presence  of  a  known 
weight  of  the  substance  of  which  the  molecular  weight  is 
required. 


CHAPTER   III 

Dissociation — Electrolytic  Dissociation  or 
lonisation. 

Dissociation. — A  certain  number  of  substances  are 
known  which  apparently  do  not  conform  to  the  laws  which 
have  been  explained  in  the  last  chapter.  For  example,  the 
compound  of  ammonia  with  hydrochloric  acid,  which  has 
the  formula  NH4C1,  should  have  the  density  26.75,  f°r 
the  atomic  weights  of  the  elements  it  contains  are  N=  14  ; 
H=  i  ;  Cl=  35.5  ;  and  the  molecular  weight  is  the  sum 
of  14  +  4+  35.5  =  53.5.  But  the  found  density  is  only 
one  quarter  of  this  number,  viz.,  13.375.  It  was  at  first 
imagined  that  this  discrepancy  was  to  be  explained  by 
abnormal  expansion  of  the  gas  ;  but  with  such  a  supposition, 
of  course,  Avogadro's  law  could  not  hold.  Other  sub- 
stances which  show  the  same  " abnormal  densities"  are 
pentachloride  of  phosphorus  and  sulphuric  acid.  To  ex- 
plain this  abnormality,  Henri  Saint- Claire  Deville  pro- 
pounded the  idea  that  such  substances  do  not  go  into  the 
state  of  gas  as  compounds,  but  that  they  split  into  simpler 
components,  each  of  which  has  its  usual  density,  and  a 
mixture  of  the  components  will  exhibit  a  mean  density. 
Thus,  if  ammonium  chloride  be  imagined  to  decompose  into 
ammonia  and  hydrogen  chloride  on  changing  into  gas,  then 
the  density  of  the  supposed  ammonium  chloride  gas  will  be 
the  mean  of  the  densities  of  its  two  constituents.  Ammonia 
has  the  formula  NH3,  and  hydrogen  chloride,  HC1 ;  the 
former  has  the  density  8.5,  and  the  latter,  18.25  »  an^  tne 


32  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

mean  of  these  two  numbers  is  13.375.  Phosphoric  chloride, 
which  has  the  formula  PC15,  splits  in  a  similar  manner  into 
PC13  and  C10  ;  and  sulphuric  acid,  H2SO4,  into  water, 
H26,  and  sulphuric  anhydride,  SOg.  To  this  kind  of 
decomposition,  where  the  bodies  which  are  decomposed  by 
a  rise  of  temperature  re-unite  on  cooling  to  form  the  origi* 
nal  substance,  Deville  gave  the  name  dissociation.  It  has 
been  found  possible,  by  taking  advantage  of  the  fact  that 
light  gases,  like  ammonia,  pass  out  through  an  opening, 
or,  as  it  is  termed,  "  diffuse"  more  rapidly  than  heavier 
gases,  like  hydrogen  chloride,  to  separate  these  gases, 
and  thus  to  prove  that  they  exist  as  such  in  the  vapour 
of  ammonium  chloride ;  for  compounds  are  not  decom- 
posed into  their  constituents  by  diffusion  ;  hydrogen  chlo- 
ride diffuses  as  such,  and  is  not  split  into  hydrogen  and 
chlorine. 

Let  us  look  at  this  dissociation  from  another  standpoint. 
We  know  that  if  2  grams  of  hydrogen,  or  32  grams  of 
oxygen,  or  28  grams  of  nitrogen,  or,  in  fact,  the  molecular 
weight  of  any  gas  expressed  in  grams,  be  caused  to  occupy 
22,380  cubic  centimeters  at  o°  C.,  the  pressure  exerted  by 
the  gas  will  be  76  centimeters  of  mercury.  If  the  tempe- 
rature is  higher,  the  pressure  will  be  increased  proportionally 
to  the  increase  in  absolute  temperature.  Thus,  suppose  the 
'temperature  were  300°  C.,  the  pressure  would  be  increased 
in  the  proportion  273°  Abs.  :  573°Abs.  ::  7 6 cms.  :  1 60 cms. 
Now,  if  53.5  grams  of  ammonium  chloride  were  placed  in 
a  vacuous  vessel  of  22,380  cc.  capacity,  and  the  temperature 
were  raised  to  300°  C.,  and  if  no  dissociation  were  to 
take  place,  one  would  expect  a  pressure  equal  to  that  of 
1 60  cms.  of  mercury.  It  has  been  found,  however,  that 
the  actual  pressure  is  twice  that  amount,  or  320  cms.  In 
order  to  account  for  the  doubled  pressure,  the  supposition 
that  dissociation  has  taken  place  must  again  be  made  ;  that 
is,  in  order  that  the  pressure  must  be  doubled,  twice  as  many 
molecules  must  be  present  as  one  would  have  supposed  from 
the  weight  taken.  The  fact  of  dissociation  may  accordingly 


DISSOLVED   SALTS  33 

be  inferred  either  from  a  diminished  density  or  from  an 
increased  pressure. 

"Dissociation"   of  Salts  in   Solution. — Few 

measurements  of  the  osmotic  pressure  of  salts  have  been 
made,  owing  to  the  difficulty  in  producing  a  membrane  which 
shall  allow  water  to  pass,  and  which  shall  be  impermeable 
to  salts.  But  very  numerous  measurements  of  the  depression 
in  freezing-point  and  the  rise  in  boiling-point  of  solutions  of 
salts  have  been  made  ;  and  it  has  been  already  explained 
that  these  quantities  are  proportional  to  the  osmotic  pressure 
of  the  dissolved  substances.  It  has  been  experimentally 
discovered  that  in  all  such  cases  the  fall  in  freezing-point, 
or  the  rise  in  boiling-point  is  too  great  for  the  supposed 
molecular  weight  of  the  salt.  It  must  be  concluded  that 
the  osmotic  pressure  would  also  be  increased,  were  it  possible 
to  measure  it.  But  the  fall  in  freezing-point  or  the  rise  in 
boiling-point  does  not  imply  a  doubled  osmotic  pressure, 
when  there  is  reason  to  expect  it,  unless  the  solution  is  very 
dilute.  Now,  if  the  pressure  were  doubled,  we  might  argue 
from  such  cases  as  ammonium  chloride  that  dissociation  into 
two  portions  had  occurred  ;  but  in  moderately  concentrated 
solutions,  as  the  pressure  is  not  doubled,  it  must  be  concluded 
that  the  dissociation  is  not  complete  ;  it  is  only  in  very 
dilute  solutions  that  complete  dissociation  can  be  imagined  to 
have  taken  place.  Cases  are  known  where  substances  in  the 
state  of  gas  undergo  gradual  dissociation,  and  then  the  pres- 
sure does  not  attain  its  maximum  until  the  temperature  has 
been  sufficiently  raised  or  the  pressure  sufficiently  re- 
duced. The  reason  that  this  is  not  noticed  with  ammonium 
chloride  is  that  the  temperature  of  complete  dissociation  has 
been  reached  before  the  substance  turns  to  gas. 

Common  salt  is  chloride  of  sodium  ;  its  formula  is 
NaCl  ;  and  for  long  the  suggestion  that  it  dissociated 
into  an  atom  of  sodium  and  an  atom  of  chlorine  on  being 
dissolved  in  water  was  received  as  too  improbable  to  be 
worth  consideration.  There  is,  of  course,  another  way 
out  of  the  difficulty  ;  it  is  to  suppose  that  a  molecule  of 

VOL.  i.  C 


34  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

salt  has  the  formula  Na9Cl2  ;  in  that  case,  117  grams  of 
salt — (2  x  23)  +  (2  x  35.5) — dissolved  in  10,000  grams 
of  water  should  produce  the  normal  lowering  of  freezing- 
point  ;  or,  if  it  produced  a  larger  lowering,  it  might  be 
supposed  that  these  complex  molecules  had  split  more  or 
less  completely  into  the  simpler  molecules,  NaCl.  But 
though  the  explanation  suggested  might  account  for  this 
instance,  it  is  incapable  of  accounting  for  the  fact  that 
chloride  of  barium,  which  is  known  to  possess  the  formula 
BaCl2  (or  a  multiple  thereof),  gives,  in  sufficiently  dilute 
solution,  a  depression  three  times  that  which  one  would 
have  expected  from  its  supposed  molecular  weight,  or  that 
ferricyanide  of  potassium  and  ferrocyanide  of  potassium, 
the  formulae  of  which  are  respectively  K8Fe(CN)6  and 
K4Fe(CN)6,  should  give  four  and  five  times  the  expected 
depression.  But  these  results  are  quite  consistent  with  the 
hypothesis  that 

NaCl  +  Aq  decomposes  into  Na.  Aq  and  Cl.  Aq  ; 
BaCl2  +  Aq  decomposes  into  Ba.  Aq  and  Cl.  Aq,  and  Cl.  Aq  ; 
K3Fe(CN)6  +  Aq  decomposes  into  K.Aq  +  K.Aq  +  K.  Aq, 

and  Fe(CN)6.Aq;   and 
K4Fe(CN)6  +  Aq  decomposes  into  K.Aq  +  K.Aq  +  K.Aq 

+  K.Aq,  and  Fe(CN)6.Aq. 

(The  symbol  "  Aq  "  stands  for  an  indefinite  but  large 
amount  of  water — "aqua.")  Here  again  we  are  face  to 
face  with  facts  and  an  attempted  explanation.  The  facts  are 
that  certain  compounds,  which  have  long  been  known  as 
"  salts,"  give  too  great  a  depression  of  the  freezing-point 
or  too  great  a  rise  of  boiling-point  of  the  solvent  in  which 
they  are  dissolved,  corresponding  to  too  great  an  osmotic 
pressure.  It  has  been  observed  that  when  the  dilution  is 
sufficient  the  depression  in  each  case  reaches  a  maximum, 
and  that  that  maximum  is  two,  three,  four,  or  five  times 
what  might  be  expected  ;  and  in  each  case  it  is  possible  to 
divide  the  salt  into  two,  three,  four,  or  five  imaginary  por- 
tions, which  often  consist  of  atoms,  though  frequently  of 
groups  of  atoms. 


ELECTROLYSIS  35 

Electrolytic  Conductivity  of  Salt  Solutions.— 

This  hypothesis,  that  a  kind  of  dissociation  takes  place  in 
salt  solution,  might  have  failed  to  gain  acceptance  had  it 
not  been  for  a  very  remarkable  coincidence.  It  appears 
that  all  solutions  which  show  this  behaviour  allow  an  electric 
current  to  pass  through  them,  whereas  all  solutions  of  com- 
pounds such  as  cane-sugar,  do  not  permit  the  passage  of  a 
current  of  electricity.  The  latter  class  of  compounds  is 
called  "  non-conducting  ;  "  the  former,  class  contains  com- 
pounds which  are  "  conductors  "  of  electricity.  But  metals 
and  certain  compounds,  chiefly  consisting  of  the  sulphides 
of  the  metals,  are  also  conductors  of  electricity,  with  this 
difference,  however  :  while  the  latter  are  apparently  un- 
altered by  the  passage  of  the  electric  current,  solutions  of 
salts  undergo  profound  change.  In  some  cases,  oxygen 
appears  in  bubbles  at  the  plate  connected  with  the  positive 
pole  of  the  battery,  while  hydrogen  is  evolved  from  that 
connected  with  the  negative  pole  ;  in  others,  when  the  dis- 
solved substance  is  a  salt  of  such  metals  as  copper,  silver,  or 
mercury,  the  metals  themselves  are  deposited  on  the  negative 
pole,  or,  as  it  is  usually  termed,  the  "  kathode  ;  "  while  if 
chlorine,  bromine,  or  iodine  is  one  of  the  constituents  of 
the  salt,  it  is  evolved  at  the  "  anode  "  or  positive  pole. 

Faraday's  Law. — It  was  discovered  in  1833  by 
Michael  Faraday,  Professor  of  Chemistry  in  the  Royal 
Institution  in  London,  that  if  an  electric  current  be  passed 
simultaneously  through  different  solutions,  the  weights  of  metals 
deposited  or  of  elements  or  groups  of  elements  liberated  are 
proportional  to  their  equivalents  (see  p.  I  5 ).  If  the  same  cur- 
rent be  passed,  for  example,  through  a  solution  of  dilute  sul- 
phuric acid,  copper  sulphate,  and  iodide  of  potassium,  each 
contained  in  its  own  vessel,  provided  with  plates  of  platinum 
or  some  other  unattackable  metal  dipping  into  the  solution, 
for  every  gram  of  hydrogen  evolved  from  the  kathode  in 
the  vessel  containing  sulphuric  acid,  8  grams  of  oxygen  are 
evolved  from  the  anode  ;  32.7  grams  of  copper  are  de- 
posited on  the  kathode  dipping  into  the  copper  solution, 


36  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

while  8  grams  of  oxygen  rise  in  bubbles  from  the  anode  ; 
and  lastly,  127  grams  of  iodine  are  liberated  from  the  anode 
in  the  vessel  containing  potassium  iodide,  I  gram  of  hydrogen 
rising  from  the  kathode.  The  evolution  of  hydrogen 
instead  of  the  deposition  of  potassium  is  due  to  the  fact 
that  the  metal  potassium  is  unable  to  exist  in  presence  of 
water,  but  immediately  displaces  its  equivalent  of  hydrogen. 
All  these  numbers  are  in  the  proportions  of  the  equivalents 
of  the  elements.  And  without  the  liberation  of  these 
elements  no  current  passes.  The  elements  may,  there- 
fore, in  a  certain  sense,  be  said  to  convey  the  electricity  ; 
and  as  the  same  quantity  of  electricity  passes  through  each 
solution,  liberating  equivalents  of  the  elements  in  each  case, 
it  would  appear  that  the  same  quantity  of  electricity  is  con- 
veyed by  quantities  of  elements  proportional  to  their  equiva- 
lents. The  equivalent  of  an  element,  it  will  be  remembered, 
is  the  weight  of  the  element  which  can  combine  with  or  re- 
place one  part  by  weight  of  hydrogen  ;  it  may  be  identical 
with,  or  it  may  be  a  fraction  of  the  atomic  weight.  In 
the  instances  given  above,  the  equivalents  of  iodine  and  of 
potassium  are  identical  in  numerical  value  with  their  atomic 
weights  ;  but  those  of  oxygen  and  of  copper,  8  and  32.7, 
are  half  their  atomic  weights,  which  are  respectively  1 6  and 
63.4.  It  would  follow,  therefore,  that  an  atom  of  copper 
or  of  oxygen  is  capable  of  conveying  a  quantity  of  electri- 
city twice  as  great  as  that  conveyed  by  an  atom  of  hydrogen 
or  of  iodine. 

But  how  is  it  known  that  the  atoms  "  convey  "  quantities 
of  electricity  ?  Must  they  be  imagined  as  like  boats,  taking 
in  their  load  of  electricity  at  one  pole,  and  ferrying  it  over 
to  the  other,  and  there  discharging  ?  It  was  at  one  time 
held  that  the  process  rather  resembled  the  method  of 
loading  a  barge  with  bricks,  where  a  row  of  men,  who 
may  stand  for  the  atoms,  pass  bricks,  representing  the 
electricity,  from  one  to  the  other.  But  it  was  proved 
by  Hittorf  that  the  charged  atoms  actually  travel  or 
"migrate"  from  one  pole  to  the  other,  carrying  with 


TRANSPORT   OF    ELECTRICITY  37 

them  their  electric  charges.  And  the  charged  atoms,  for 
which  the  name  "  ions,"  or  "things  which  go,"  was  de- 
vised by  Faraday,  do  not  always  move  at  the  same  rates. 
The  rate  of  motion  depends  on  the  friction  which  the  ions 
undergo  on  moving  through  the  water  or  other  solvent  in 
which  the  salt  is  dissolved.  This  friction  is  different  for 
different  ions  ;  it  also  depends  on  the  particular  solvent  em- 
ployed ;  and  it  is  diminished  if  the  temperature  is  raised. 
The  force  which  impels  the  ions  is  the  same  as  that  commonly 
known  as  electric  attraction  and  repulsion ;  the  negatively 
charged  atoms  or  "kations"  being  repelled  from  the  negative 
and  attracted  by  the  positive  electrode  dipping  into  the  solu- 
tion, while  the  positively  charged  atoms  or  "anions"  are 
repelled  by  the  anode  and  attracted  by  the  kathode. 

When  the  anions  touch  the  kathode,  they  are  discharged  ; 
and  similarly,  when  the  kations  touch  the  anode,  they  lose 
their  charge.  And  for  every  anion  discharged,  a  kation 
must  simultaneously  lose  its  charge.  The  result  of  this 
is  that  the  number  of  anions  remaining  in  solution  must 
always  be  equivalent  to  the  number  of  kations.  It  need 
not  always  be  the  same,  for  it  is  possible  for  a  kation 
like  copper  to  carry  twice  the  charge  of  an  anion  like 
chlorine ;  but  the  number  of  "  electrons,"  or  electric 
charges,  must  always  be  the  same,  although  some  ions 
are  capable  of  carrying  more  than  one  electron.  There 
can  never,  therefore,  be  an  excess  of,  say,  copper  ions 
in  solution  ;  for  they  are  always  balanced  by  the  requisite 
number  of  anions.  Thus,  if  the  solution  be  evaporated, 
the  remaining  salt  has  its  usual  composition  ;  though,  of 
course,  there  is  less  of  it  than  if  none  had  been  decomposed. 

Hittorf  s  Migration  Constants. — The  fact  that  ions 
move  at  different  rates  can  be  demonstrated  in  two  ways, 
one  direct,  the  other  indirect.  The  indirect  method  was 
devised  by  Hittorf;  the  direct  method,  which  is  much 
more  recent,  was  first  suggested  by  Lodge. 

It  is  always  advisable  to  form  a  mental  picture,  if 
possible,  of  any  physical  phenomenon,  pour  preciser  les 


38  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

idee*)  as  the  French  say  ;  and  a  trivial  illustration  will  be 
now  given  which  may  render  HittorFs  conception  clearer. 
Imagine  a  ball-room  with  a  door  at  each  end.  Suppose 
the  partners  to  be  all  separated  from  each  other  ;  and 
suppose  an  order  to  be  given  that  the  men  shall  march  to 
one  door  at  twice  the  rate  at  which  the  ladies  make  for 
the  other  door ;  but  that  at  the  same  time,  for  every  man 
who  passes  through  the  one  door,  only  one  lady  shall 
pass  through  the  other  door.  At  a  given  signal,  say  when 
half  the  ballroom  has  escaped,  let  the  condition  of  the 
room  be  examined.  It  is  easy  to  see  that  there  will  be 
an  equal  number  of  men  and  women  in  the  room,  but 
that  there  will  be  a  greater  number  round  the  door  at 
which  the  men  issue  than  round  that  at  which  the  ladies 
are  trying  to  escape.  And  the  rates  of  motion  will  be 
proportional  to  the  relative  numbers  in  each  half  of  the 
ballroom,  for  the  greater  the  rates  at  which  the  men  move 
proportionally  to  the  ladies,  the  greater  will  be  the  number 
in  that  part  of  the  room  at  which  the  men  are  escaping. 

This  is  a  conception  in  close  analogy  with  Hittorf's. 
The  men  and  women  are  the  anions  and  kations  ;  and  on 
analysing  the  solutions  round  the  anode  and  kathode,  he 
found  that  the  concentration  was,  as  a  rule,  altered,  so 
that  he  was  forced  to  conclude  that  the  rate  of  motion 
towards  the  pole  at  which  the  concentration  was  increased 
was  more  rapid  than  that  towards  the  pole  at  which  he 
found  the  concentration  to  be  diminished.  By  comparing 
the  concentrations,  too,  he  calculated  the  relative  rates  of 
motion  of  the  anions  and  the  kations  towards  the  kathode 
and  the  anode  respectively. 

Lodge's  direct  method  has  recently  been  improved  by 
Orme  Masson,  and  very  accurate  results  have  been  ob- 
tained by  him.  His  plan  is  to  trace  the  rate  of  motion 
of  the  anions  by  following  them  up  with  a  coloured  anion, 
such  as  the  copper  ion,  which  is  blue,  and  can  be  seen, 
while  the  rate  of  motion  of  the  kation  is  indicated  by 
following  it  up  with  a  coloured  kation  :  the  one  he  used 


MIGRATION   OF    IONS  39 

for  this  purpose  is  the  chromate  ion,  which  is  orange-yellow. 
The  apparatus  which  Masson  employed  consisted  of  two 
flasks  connected  together  by  a  narrow  tube.  This  tube 
is  rilled  with  a  solution  of  the  salt  of  which  the  rate 
of  migration  of  the  ions  is  to  be  determined,  but  in  order 
to  prevent  diffusion  of  the  liquid,  or  escape  owing  to 
currents  produced  by  differences  of  temperature,  the  water 
in  which  the  salt  is  dissolved  contains  enough  gelatine  to 
make  it  set  into  a  jelly  when  cold.  It  is  found  that  the 
gelatine  does  not  appreciably  interfere  with  the  motion  of 
the  ions.  The  one  flask  was  charged  with  a  solution  of 
copper  chloride,  and  the  anode  plate  was  of  copper.  The 
other  flask  was  charged  with  a  dilute  solution  of  a  mixture 
of  chromate  and  bichromate  of  potassium,  and  the  kathode 
was  of  platinum.  The  connecting  tube  was  filled  with  a 
warm  solution  of  the  salt  to  be  examined,  say  potassium 
chloride,  in  water  containing  gelatine,  and  after  it  had 
cooled  and  set  it  was  placed  in  position.  On  passing  the 
current,  the  potassions  migrate  towards  the  kathode,  and 
are  followed  closely  by  the  blue  cuprions,  which  serve  to 
mark  the  position  of  the  rearmost  of  the  potassions.  The 
chlorions,  on  the  other  hand,  migrate  towards  the  anode, 
followed  by  the  orange-yellow  chromations,  which  reveal 
their  position.  The  rates  can  be  measured  by  following 
the  advance  of  the  colour  in  the  tubes.  If  the  ions  have 
equal  velocity,  as  is  nearly  the  case  with  potassions  and 
chlorions,  the  meeting-place  of  the  blue  and  the  orange  is 
nearly  at  the  middle  of  the  tube  ;  but  if,  as  in  most  other 
cases,  the  rates  are  different,  the  point  of  junction  will  be 
at  one  side  or  other  of  the  middle  point  of  the  tube.  The 
distances  traversed  in  the  same  time  give  a  direct  measure 
of  the  relative  velocities  of  the  anion  and  kation.  Having 
established  this  ratio,  another  salt,  say  sodium  chloride, 
having  a  different  anion  but  the  same  kation,  can  be  em- 
ployed, and  so  the  relative  rates  of  potassion  and  sodion 
may  be  compared. 

The  table  which  follows  gives  the  rates  of  migration  of 


40  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

a  few  ions  compared  with  that  of  potassion,  which  is  taken 
as  100. 

K         Na         Li       NH4    Mg/2       Cl       SO4/2 
100       65.6      45*0      100      40.5      97-O      87.7 

As  the  conductivity  for  a  current  depends  on  the  velocity 
both  of  the  anion  and  the  kation,  relative  numbers  for  the 
conductivity  may  be  obtained  for  any  salt  by  adding  the 
numbers  of  the  individual  ions  given  above.  Thus,  if  it  is 
required  to  find  the  conductivity  of  lithium  sulphate,  which 

SO 

has  the  formula  Li2SO4,  we  have  Li  =  45,  and  ^=Sj.fjt 

together  equal  to  132.7. 

Measurement  of  the  Extent  of  lonlsation. — It 

is  found  in  practice,  however,  that  the  conductivity  of  salts 
agrees  with  the  numbers  deduced  from  the  velocity  of  their 
ions  only  when  the  solution  is  a  very  dilute  one,  and  even 
then  not  always.  This  can  be  ascribed  to  either  or  to  both 
of  two  causes.  If  the  solution  is  a  strong  one,  the  mole- 
cules of  salt  may  bear  an  appreciable  ratio  to  the  molecules 
of  water,  and  may  interfere  by  their  possibly  greater  fric- 
tion with  the  free  transit  of  the  ions.  Or,  on  the  other 
hand,  some  of  the  molecules  may  not  be  resolved  into  ions, 
and  there  may  be  fewer  "  boats  "  to  carry  across  the  elec- 
trons, the  progress  of  which  towards  the  anode  and  the 
kathode  must  consequently  be  slower,  for  the  non-ionised 
molecules  take  no  share  in  the  conveyance  of  electricity. 
And  as  the  conveyance  of  electricity  depends  on  the  number 
of  ions  and  on  the  rate  at  which  they  move,  if  the  latter  is 
known,  the  relative  number  of  ions  may  be  calculated  from 
measurements  of  the  conductivity  of  the  solution. 

Conductivity  of  Electrolytes. — To  measure  the 
conductivity  of  a  solution,  a  "gram-molecular-weight," 
i.e.  the  molecular  weight  of  the  salt  taken  in  grams,  is 
dissolved  in  a  litre  of  water.  A  small  quantity  of  this 
solution  is  placed  in  a  small  beaker  immersed  in  a  large 
tank  of  water,  so  that  the  temperature  may  not  vary  ;  for 


ELECTRIC    CONDUCTIVITY  41 

the  conductivity  increases  with  rise  of  temperature,  owing 
to  the  smaller  resistance  offered  by  hot  water  to  the  passage 
of  the  ions,  than  by  cold.  Two  circular  platinum  plates, 
the  surfaces  of  which  have  been  roughened  by  having 
platinum  deposited  on  them,  are  immersed  in  the  solution, 
so  that  one  lies  at  the  bottom  of  the  beaker,  while  the  other 
is  one  centimeter  distant  from  it,  higher  up  in  the  liquid. 
The  wire  connected  with  the  lower  plate  is  protected  by  a 
glass  tube,  in  order  that  the  current  may  pass  only  between 
the  plates.  To  measure  the  conductivity  of  this  solution  an 
arrangement  termed  a  "  Wheatstone's  bridge  "  is  employed, 


the  construction  of  which  will  be  understood  from  the  an- 
nexed diagram.  B  is  a  battery,  actuating  a  small  toy  coil,  C, 
from  the  secondary  terminals  of  which  T  T  wires  proceed 
to  the  measuring-bridge  Mb,  which  consists  of  a  straight 
piece  of  nickel-silver  wire  stretched  along  a  scale.  From 
one  end  of  the  bridge,  b,  the  current  traverses  the  solution  ; 
from  the  other,  M,  the  current  passes  through  a  resistance- 
box,  R,  containing  bobbins  of  wire  of  known  resistance,  the 
number  and  resistance  of  which  can  be  varied  at  will  until 
the  resistance  is  nearly  equal  to  that  of  the  solution.  If 
they  are  exactly  equal,  and  if  the  pointer  P  is  exactly  in 


42  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

the  middle  of  the  bridge-wire  Mb,  then  no  sound  can  be 
heard  in  the  telephone  T.  The  resistance  of  the  solution 
can  then  be  read  from  the  box.  If,  as  generally  happens, 
the  resistance  of  the  solution  is  not  equal  to  that  in  the  box, 
it  is  necessary  to  move  the  pointer  P  until  the  resistances  are 
equal.  Having  thus  ascertained  the  resistance  of  the  solu- 
tion, a  portion  is  diluted  with  water,  so  that  its  strength  is 
exactly  half  of  the  former,  and  the  resistance  is  again  deter- 
mined. Successive  dilutions  in  which  the  volume  of  the 
solution  is  doubled,  and  again  doubled,  are  made,  and  in 
this  manner  the  resistance  due  to  an  equal  number  of  mole- 
cules in  each  case  is  calculated.  The  conductivity  is  the 
reciprocal  of  the  resistance,  and  it  is  found  that  the  mole- 
cular conductivity  increases  with  the  dilution  up  to  a  certain 
point.  Thus  Kohlrausch,  the  deviser  of  this  method,  found 
the  following  numbers  for  sodium  chloride : — 

Concentration :  Molecular  Relative  number  of  ions 

58.5  grams  in  conductivity,  per  TOO  molecules  of  salt. 

1  litre  69.5  67.5 

2  litres  75.7  73.6 
10    „  86.5  84.1 

100  „  96.2  93.5 

1,000  „  100.8  98.0 

10,000  ,,  102.9  100.0 

50,000  „  102.8  100.0 

It  is  evident  that  58.5  grams  of  salt  dissolved  in  10,000 
litres  of  water  give  a  maximum  conductivity,  for  the  dilu- 
tion to  50,000  litres  is  attended  by  no  further  increase. 
That  the  altered  velocity  is  not  influenced  by  the  frictional 
resistance  of  the  water  is  obvious,  for  the  solution  of  58.5 
grams  of  salt  in  10  litres  of  water  does  not  differ  much 
from  pure  water  in  this  respect.  The  increase  in  conducti- 
vity must  accordingly  be  attributed  to  an  increase  in  the 
number  of  ions  at  the  expense  of  the  molecules  ;  and,  as 
a  dilution  in  50,000  litres  of  water  produces  no  greater 
conductivity  than  in  10,000,  it  must  be  concluded  that 


CONDUCTIVITY   OF   WATER  43 

complete  ionisation  has  taken  place.  The  figures  in  the 
last  column  are  obtained  by  simple  proportion,  thus  : — As 
102.9  :  69.5  ::  I0°  :  67.5. 

The  extent  of  ionisation  calculated  from  the  conducti- 
vities of  salt  solutions  agrees  well  in  the  main  with  that 
calculated  from  the  depressions  of  freezing-point. 

Conductivity  of  Pure  Water. — Two  points  remain 
to  be  mentioned.  One  has  reference  to  the  conductivity  of 
pure  water.  It  is  no  easy  matter  to  prepare  pure  water ; 
even  after  the  water  has  been  distilled,  it  contains  traces 
of  substances  which  are  ionised,  such  as  carbonic  acid  or 
ammonia.  It  is  possible,  by  employing  special  precautions, 
to  add  to  the  water  before  distillation  substances  which  form 
non-volatile  compounds  with  these  impurities,  and  by  making 
use  of  vessels  of  gold  or  platinum,  which  are  not  attacked, 
however  slightly,  by  water,  to  produce  almost  pure  water. 
Such  water  is  not  wholly  devoid  of  conductivity,  but  its 
resistance  to  the  passage  of  electricity  is  very  great.  It 
must  be  presumed  that  the  water  is  for  the  most  part  mole- 
cules of  H2O,  or  perhaps  even  more  complex  molecules, 
such  as  H4O2,  H6O3,  &c.  But  there  are,  besides,  a  few 

+ 

ions  of  H  and  OH  ;  so  that  water  is  capable  of  reacting  in 
certain  cases  where  ions  might  be  suspected. 

Conductivity  of  Pused  Salts. — Another  fact  which 
is  well  known,  and  largely  put  to  practical  use,  is  that  fused 
salts  are,  as  a  rule,  good  electrolytic  conductors  of  electri- 
city. Even  when  the  salt  is  as  pure  as  it  can  be  made,  it 
still  conducts  in  the  molten  state.  Although  the  conducti- 
vity of  fused  salts  has  not  been  investigated  with  the  same 
completeness  as  that  of  solutions,  yet  it  cannot  be  doubted 
that  the  salt  must  be  more  or  less  ionised.  The  ionisation 
appears  to  increase  with  rise  of  temperature,  for  the  salt 
becomes  a  better  conductor.  This,  however,  may  be  due, 
in  part  at  least,  to  the  smaller  frictional  resistance  which  it 
offers  to  the  passage  of  the  ions  towards  the  electrodes. 
.But  recent  experiments  have  shown  that  the  molecules  of 


44  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

some  salts,  at  least — those  in  which  measurement  is  possible 
— are  more  complex  than  would  be  supposed  from  their 
formulae.  Thus,  nitre,  KNO3,  consists  of  molecules  of 
four  times  that  complexity,  or  K4N4O12  ;  and  it  is  not 
improbable  that  among  these  complex  molecules  there  are 

+ 

some  ions  of  K  and  of  NO3  capable  of  conveying  an  elec- 
tric charge.  It  may  indeed  be  stated  that  those  liquids 
which  possess  complex  molecules  have  the  power  of  ionis- 
ing salts  dissolved  in  them.  Water  is  one  of  the  most 
striking  examples  ;  and  it  is  to  be  presumed  that  such  com- 
plex molecules  are  able  to  surround  and  prevent  ions  from 
at  once  discharging  into  one  another  by  protecting  them 
from  each  other. 

To  sum  up : — Certain  substances,  in  the  state  of  gas, 
exhibit  dissociation — that  is,  they  decompose  into  simpler 
constituents,  which  combine  again  on  cooling.  This  disso- 
ciation is  favoured  by  a  rise  of  temperature  or  by  a  lowered 
pressure,  and  reversed  by  a  fall  of  temperature  or  a  rise  of 
pressure.  From  a  determination  of  the  density  of  the  mix- 
ture of  gases  the  extent  of  the  dissociation  can  be  calculated. 
Certain  substances,  in  like  manner,  and  such  substances  are 
generally  named  "  salts,"  when  dissolved  in  water  or  certain 
other  solvents,  undergo  electric  dissociation  or  ionisation  ; 
this  dissociation  is  often  increased  by  a  rise  of  temperature, 
and  always  by  dilution.  The  constituents  of  such  solutions, 
the  anions  and  kations,  can  be  urged  in  opposite  directions 
by  an  electric  current  ;  they  usually  "  migrate  "  at  different 
rates  ;  and  when  they  discharge,  by  contact  with  the  elec- 
trodes, they  are  sometimes  liberated  in  the  free  state,  as,  for 
example,  many  metals,  and  bromine  and  iodine  ;  but  some- 
times the  discharged  ion  is  incapable  of  existing  in  the  free 
state  in  contact  with  the  solvent,  and  in  this  case  they 
react  with  the  water,  and  form  new  secondary  compounds. 
The  amount  of  this  ionisation  can  be  measured  by  deter- 
minations of  the  depression  of  freezing-point,  or  of  the 
conductivity,  of  the  solution. 


CHAPTER  IV 

Elements: — Methods  of  Preparation;  Classifi- 
cation ;  Valency.  Compounds : — Structural 
Formulas;  Classification;  Nomenclature. 

WE  have  seen,  in  Chapter  L,  how  the  idea  of  an  "  element  " 
as  a  constituent  of  compounds  gradually  became  more  de- 
fined. As  fresh  discoveries  were  made,  it  was  found  that 
certain  substances  could  not  further  be  decomposed,  yielding 
new  constituents.  But  it  is  not  easy  always  to  determine 
whether  or  no  a  substance  is  an  element.  For  certain 
compounds  are  very  stable,  that  is,  are  very  difficult  to  de- 
compose ;  and  it  has  happened  several  times  that  such  com- 
pounds were  mistaken  for  elements.  A  remarkable  instance 
is  a  copper-coloured  body,  found  in  the  debris  left  in  the 
hearth  of  an  old  iron  furnace,  which  was  for  long  supposed 
to  be  the  element  titanium  ;  more  careful  investigation, 
however,  proved  it  to  be  a  compound  of  titanium  with 
nitrogen  and  carbon. 

Methods  of  Preparing  Elements. — There  are 
three  methods  by  which  elements  have  been  prepared,  and 
all  elements  have  been  made  by  one  of  these  methods. 
They  are : — 

(i)  Separation  of  the  Element  by  Means  of  an 
Electric  Current. — We  have  already  seen  that  the  com- 
pound must  be  ionised,  and  this  is  attained  only  by  dissolv- 
ing it  in  water  or  some  other  appropriate  solvent,  or  by 
fusing  it.  It  is  the  act  of  solution  or  of  fusion  which 
ionises  the  compound  ;  and  the  effect  of  the  current  is  to 

45 


46  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

direct  the  ions  towards  one  or  other  electrode,  and  dis- 
charge them  ;  they  then  assume  the  form  of  the  free  ele- 
ment. It  is  necessary,  in  order  that  this  method  shall 
succeed,  that  the  discharged  ion  shall  not  act  on  the  solvent, 
nor  on  the  electrode.  It  is  impossible,  for  instance,  to 
deposit  sodium  from  an  aqueous  solution  of  any  of  its  salts, 
for  no  sooner  is  the  sodlon  discharged  than  it  is  attacked  by 
the  water  ;  hydrogen  is  evolved  in  equivalent  amount  to  the 
sodium,  and  sodium  hydroxide  is  produced,  in  which  the 
sodium  has  taken  the  place  of  one  of  the  hydrogen  atoms  in 
water ;  its  formula  is  therefore  NaOH.  Chlorine,  too, 
cannot  be  produced  by  the  electrolysis  of  a  chloride,  if  the 
anode  is  of  iron,  for  example,  for  it  at  once  unites  with  the 
iron,  and  forms  a  chloride  of  that  metal  instead  of  coming 
off  as  an  element. 

( 2 )  Separation  of  an  Element  from  a  Compound  by 
Heat. — There  appears  to  be  little  doubt  that  at  a  suffi- 
ciently high  temperature  all  compounds  would  be  decom- 
posed into  their  elements :  in  the  sun,  which  possesses  a 
temperature  much  higher  than  can  be  reached  by  any  means 
at  our  disposal,  it  is  probable  that  all  compounds  are  decom- 
posed. But  certain  compounds,  like  silica  or  quartz,  for 
example,  are  so  stable  that  they  resist  the  highest  tempera- 
ture which  we  can  give  them,  without  any  change,  except 
fusion  and  volatilisation.  There  is,  moreover,  another 
reason  why  this  process  often  fails  to  isolate  an  element. 
The  compound  may  be  decomposed  on  heating,  but  its  con- 
stituents may  re-unite  on  cooling,  unless  one  of  them  is 
more  volatile  than  the  other,  and  removes  itself  from  the 
sphere  of  action.  For  these  reasons  this  process  of  obtain- 
ing elements  is  of  somewhat  limited  application.  But  it 
forms  the  most  convenient  method  of  preparing  oxygen  ; 
for  example,  if  oxide  of  mercury  be  heated,  it  decomposes 
into  gaseous  oxygen,  the  boiling-point  of  which  lies  far 
below  atmospheric  temperature,  —182°;  while  the  mer- 
cury, which  boils  at  358°,  although  it  volatilises  at  the 
temperature  requisite  to  effect  the  decomposition  of  the 


SEPARATION   OF   ELEMENTS  47 

oxide,  condenses  in  the  flask  or  tube  in  which  the  oxide  is 
heated.  Sulphide  of  gold,  too,  can  be  separated  into  gold  and 
sulphur  on  being  heated;  for  while  sulphur  boils  at  446°,  the 
boiling-point  of  gold  is  probably  not  much  below  2000°. 

(3)  Separation  of  an  Element  from  a  Compound 
by  Displacement. — On  heating  one  element  with  a  com- 
pound of  another  element,  it  not  infrequently  happens  that 
the  element  in  combination  is  displaced  and  liberated,  while 
the  other  element  takes  its  place  in  the  compound.  This  is 
doubtless  an  ionic  phenomenon  ;  one  element — that  in  com- 
bination— being  ionised,  and  hence  electrically  charged, 
exchanges  its  charge  with  the  added  element,  which  in  its 
turn  becomes  ionised.  A  solution  of  iodide  of  sodium,  for 

+ 

example,  contains  todions  and  sections,  I  and  Na.  On 
adding  to  it  a  solution  of  chlorine  in  water,  in  which  there 
are  certainly  many  non-ionised  chlorine  molecules,  C10,  mole- 
o- 
cular iodine,  I — I  is  set  free,  while  ionised  chlorine,  Cl, 
goes  into  solution.  The  free  iodine  forms  a  brown  solu- 
tion, or,  if  much  is  present,  a  black  precipitate.  Again, 
when  metallic  sodium  is  heated  with  magnesium  chloride  to 
a  red  heat,  globules  of  metallic  magnesium  are  set  free, 
while  the  sodium  enters  into  combination  with  the  chlorine. 
It  may  be  supposed  that  on  fusion  the  magnesium  chloride 
contains  some  ions  of  chlorine  and  magnesium  ;  the  non- 
ionised  sodium  takes  the  charge  of  the  ionised  magnesium, 
while  the  latter  metal  is  liberated  in  an  non-ionised  state. 
But  it  may  be  objected  that  only  those  magnesium  ions 
which  exist  as  such  should  exchange  their  charges  with  the 
sodium  ;  that  is  true  ;  but  when  they  have  done  so  others 
become  ionised  and  undergo  a  similar  change ;  for  if  the 
temperature  be  kept  constant,  the  ratio  between  the  number 
of  the  ionised  atoms  of  magnesium  and  the  non-ionised 
atoms  of  magnesium  in  the  chloride  must  remain  constant, 
so  that  when  the  magnesium  ions  are  replaced  by  sodium 
ions,  other  molecules  of  magnesium  chloride  become  ionised 
to  keep  up  the  balance. 


48  MODERN  CHEMISTRY 

The  element  carbon  is  most  frequently  used  to  displace 
other  elements.  In  its  case,  little  or  nothing  is  known  of 
the  electrical  actions  ;  but  if  analogy  may  be  taken  as  a 
guide,  its  action  may  be  attributed  to  a  similar  exchange 
of  electric  charge  between  the  displaced  element  and  the 
carbon.  But  here  the  carbon,  as  soon  as  it  unites  with  the 
oxygen  which  was  previously  in  combination  with  the  dis- 
placed element,  escapes  in  the  form  of  gas,  and  the  oxide  of 
carbon  is  certainly  not  an  ionised  compound. 

An  essential  condition  for  the  preparation  of  elements  by 
the  method  of  displacement  is  that  the  element  which  it  is 
proposed  to  prepare  in  the  free  state  shall  not  itself  com- 
bine with  the  element  which  is  used  to  displace  it.  Thus, 
chlorine  cannot  be  used  to  displace  either  carbon  or  sulphur 
from  the  compound  of  carbon  with  sulphur,  bisulphide  of 
carbon,  since  it  itself  combines  with  both  the  carbon  and 
the  sulphur,  yielding  chloride  of  sulphur  together  with 
chloride  of  carbon.  In  general,  however,  this  difficulty 
does  not  occur. 

The  elements  which  are  generally  used  for  the  displacement 
of  others  from  their  compounds  are  : — 

1.  Free  hydrogen  at   a  red   heat    which   displaces 

elements  from  their  oxides  or  chlorides. 

2.  Ions  of  hydrogen,  on  the  point  of  being  discharged 

electrically,  or  hydrogen  "  in  the  nascent  state,"  i.e. 
hydrogen  being  set  free  from  its  compounds  by  the 
action  of  a  metal ;  it  also  displaces  elements  frorn  their 
oxides  or  chlorides,  or,  in  general,  from  their  salts. 

3.  Metallic  sodium,  which  displaces  elements  from  their 

chlorides  or  fluorides. 

4.  Metallic  magnesium,  which  displaces  elements  from 

their  chlorides  or  oxides. 

5.  Metallic  aluminium,  which  displaces  elements  from 

their  oxides. 

6.  Metallic  iron,  which  displaces  elements  from  their 

sulphides. 

7.  Fluorine,    which    displaces    oxygen     from    water  ; 


CLASSIFICATION  49 

chlorine  in  sunlight,  which  acts  slowly  in  the  same 
way  ;  chlorine  displaces  bromine,  and  bromine, 
iodine. 

8.  Carbon,  which  is  the  most  generally  employed  agent 
for  replacing  other  elements  ;  it  combines  with  oxy- 
gen, forming  carbonic  oxide  or  carbonic  anhydride 
gases,  and  liberating  the  element  with  which  the 
oxygen  was  combined. 

The  question  of  cost  or  of  convenience  often  decides  as 
to  which  of  these  methods  is  used.  In  the  sequel,  only 
the  more  generally  used  plan  will  be  described.  It  must 
be  remembered,  too,  that  the  employment  of  these  processes 
does  not  always  lead  to  the  isolation  of  the  element ;  in 
many  cases  a  compound  is  produced,  containing  less  of  the 
element  which  it  was  intended  to  remove  ;  and  it  is  some- 
times difBcult  to  decide  whether  or  not  an  element  has  really 
been  set  free.  Experiments  on  its  compounds  are  often 
required  to  decide  the  question. 

Classification  of  Elements. — For  long  it  had  been 
noted  that  certain  elements  displayed  a  marked  similarity 
with  each  other.  Thus  the  metals  sodium  and  potassium, 
discovered  by  Sir  Humphry  Davy,  are  both  white,  soft, 
easily  oxidisable  metals,  forming  soluble  salts  with  almost 
all  acids  ;  these  salts  resemble  each  other  in  colour,  in 
crystalline  form,  and  in  other  properties.  The  subsequently 
discovered  metals,  lithium,  rubidium,  and  caesium,  have  also 
a  strong  resemblance  to  potassium  and  sodium.  Their 
atomic  weights  also  increase  progressively  ;  thus  we  have 
the  series,  Li  =  7,  Na=  23,  K  =  39-i,  Rb  =  85,  and  Cs  = 
133.  Similar  series  had  been  noticed  with  calcium,  stron- 
tium, and  barium  ;  magnesium,  zinc,  and  cadmium  ;  and 
so  on.  It  was  not  until  1863  that  John  Newlands  called 
attention  to  the  fact  that  if  the  elements  be  arranged  in  the 
order  of  their  atomic  weights  a  curious  fact  becomes  notice- 
able. It  is  that,  omitting  hydrogen,  the  first,  the  eighth, 
the  fifteenth,  and,  in  short,  all  elements  may  be  so  arranged 
that  the  "  difference  between  the  number  of  the  lowest 
member  of  a  group  and  that  immediately  above  it  is  7  ;  in 
VOL.  i.  D 


50  MODERN   CHEMISTRY* 

other  words,  the  eighth  element  starting  from  a  given  one  is 
a  kind  of  repetition  of  the  first,  like  the  eighth  note  of  an 
octave  in  music."  This  idea  was  subsequently  discovered 
independently  and  elaborated  by  Lothar  Meyer  and  by  D. 
Mendele'eff,  and  it  has  now  been  adopted,  in  spite  of  some 
difficulties,  as  the  ground-work  of  classification  of  chemical 
substances. 

The  table  may  be  given  in  the  following  form,  although 
there  are  many  ways  of  representing  the  order  in  which  the 
elements  lie : — 

The  Atomic  Weights  of  the  Elements  arranged1 
according  to  the  Periodic  System. 


H 

He 

Li 

Be 

B 

C 

N 

0 

i 

4 

7 

9 

1  1 

12 

»4 

16 

F 

Me 

Na 

Mg 

Al 

Si 

P 

S 

19 

20 

23 

24 

27 

28 

31 

32 

Cl 

A 

K 

Ca 

Sc 

Ti 

V 

Cr 

Mn 

35 

40 

39 

40 

44 

48 

5* 

52 

55 

Br 

Kr 

Rb 

Sr 

Y 

Zr 

Nb 

Mo 

? 

80 

82 

85 

S7 

89 

90 

94 

96 

98 

I 

X 

Cs 

Ba 

La 

Ce 

Nd 

Prd 

Sm 

127 

128 

i33 

*37 

I42 

140 

141 

144 

Yb 

? 

Ta 

W 

? 

i73 

182 

184 

Th 

? 

u 

232 

240 

i 

o 

i 

ii 

iii 

iv 

v 

v« 

vii 

to 

to 

to 

to 

vii 

i 

ii 

ii 

1  It  is  a  matter  of  indifference  which  element  is  placed  first  on  the 
list.     The  most  convenient  form  to  give  the  diagram  is  that  of  two 


PERIODIC   TABLE  51 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  number  of  elements  in  the  first 
two  horizontal  rows  is  not  seven,  but  eight,  and  that,  con- 
sequently, every  ninth  element,  and  not  every  eighth,  pre- 
sents similarity  with  its  predecessor  in  the  vertical  columns. 
This  is  owing  to  the  recent  discovery  of  the  elements  in 
the  second  vertical  column.  It  will  also  be  seen  that  it  ii> 
possible,  by  folding  the  projecting  slip  to  one  side  or  other, 
to  bring  new  sets  of  elements  in  the  third  and  succeeding 
horizontal  rows  beneath  the  elements  in  the  first  and  second. 
The  first  and  second  rows  are  termed  "  short  periods,"  the 
others,  "  long  periods."  It  appears  that  by  so  arranging 
the  elements,  analogies  are  brought  out  more  striking  than 
if  such  long  and  short  periods  were  not  adopted. 

Valency. — The  Roman  numerals  below  the  vertical 
columns  refer  to  what  is  termed  the  "  valency."  An 
element  capable  of  combining  with  or  replacing  one  atom 
of  hydrogen,  or,  in  other  words,  of  which  the  equivalent 
and  atomic  weight  are  identical  (see  p.  15),  is  termed  a 
monad,  or  is  said  to  be  monovalent.  Thus,  23  grams  of 
sodium  replaces  I  gram  of  hydrogen  in  water  or  in  hydro- 
gen chloride,  to  form  hydroxide  or  chloride  of  sodium ; 
and  as  23  is  known  to  be  the  atomic  weight  of  sodium 
from  determinations  of  its  specific  heat,  the  atomic  weight 
of  sodium  is  expressed  by  the  same  number  as  its  equiva- 
lent. It  is  therefore  a  monad.  The  element  oxygen  is  a 
dyad  or  divalent,  because,  in  water,  two  grams  of  hydrogen 
are  combined  with  1 6  grams  of  oxygen  ;  its  equivalent  is 
therefore  8.  But  oxygen  is  16  times  as  heavy  as  hydro- 
gen— that  is,  a  molecule  of  oxygen  is  16  times  as  heavy  as 
a  molecule  of  hydrogen ;  and  as  a  molecule  of  each  of 
these  substances  is  believed  to  consist  of  two  atoms,  an 
atom  of  oxygen  is  16  times  as  heavy  as  an  atom  of 
hydrogen.  The  atomic  weight  is  therefore  1 6  ;  but  as 

cylinders,  on  which  the  elements  follow  spiral  lines,  so  that  oxygen 
and  fluorine,  sulphur  and  chlorine,  follow  each  other  round  the 
smaller  cylinder,  while  selenium  and  bromine,  tellurium  and  iodine, 
&c. ,  are  conspicuous  round  the  larger  cylinder. 


50  MODERN   CHEMISTRY* 

other  words,  the  eighth  element  starting  from  a  given  one  is 
a  kind  of  repetition  of  the  first,  like  the  eighth  note  of  an 
octave  in  music."  This  idea  was  subsequently  discovered 
independently  and  elaborated  by  Lothar  Meyer  and  by  D. 
Mendele'eff,  and  it  has  now  been  adopted,  in  spite  of  some 
difficulties,  as  the  ground-work  of  classification  of  chemical 
substances. 

The  table  may  be  given  in  the  following  form,  although 
there  are  many  ways  of  representing  the  order  in  which  the 
elements  lie : — 

The  Atomic  Weights  of  the  Elements  arranged1 
according  to  the  Periodic  System. 


H 

He 

Li 

Be 

B 

C 

N 

0 

i 

4 

7 

9 

1  1 

12 

»4 

16 

F 
*9 

Me 

20 

Na 
23 

Mg 
24 

Al 
27 

Si 

28 

P 

3i 

S 
32 

Fe 

Co 

Ni 

Cu 

Zn 

Ga 

Ge 

As 

Se 

56 

59 

58.7 

63 

65 

70 

72 

75 

79 

Rh 

102 

Ru 
103 

Pd 
106 

Ag 

108 

Cd 

I  12 

In 
114 

Sn 
119 

Sb 

120 

Te 
127 

? 

? 

? 

P 

? 

Gd 

? 

? 

? 

156 

Os 

Ir 

Pt 

Au 

Hg 

Tl 

Pb 

Bi 

? 

191 

X93 

194 

197 

20O 

204 

207 

208 

vin  vii  iv  in  11  iii  iv  v  vi 
to  to  to  to  and  and  and  to  to 
ii  ii  ii  i  i  i  ii  ii  H 

1  It  is  a  matter  of  indifference  which  element  is  placed  first  on  the 
list.     The  most  convenient  form  to  give  the  diagram  is  that  of  two 


PERIODIC   TABLE  51 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  number  of  elements  in  the  first 
two  horizontal  rows  is  not  seven,  but  eight,  and  that,  con- 
sequently, every  ninth  element,  and  not  every  eighth,  pre- 
sents similarity  with  its  predecessor  in  the  vertical  columns. 
This  is  owing  to  the  recent  discovery  of  the  elements  in 
the  second  vertical  column.  It  will  also  be  seen  that  it  is 
possible,  by  folding  the  projecting  slip  to  one  side  or  other, 
to  bring  new  sets  of  elements  in  the  third  and  succeeding 
horizontal  rows  beneath  the  elements  in  the  first  and  second. 
The  first  and  second  rows  are  termed  "  short  periods,"  the 
others,  "  long  periods/'  It  appears  that  by  so  arranging 
the  elements,  analogies  are  brought  out  more  striking  than 
if  such  long  and  short  periods  were  not  adopted. 

Valency. — The  Roman  numerals  below  the  vertical 
columns  refer  to  what  is  termed  the  "valency."  An 
element  capable  of  combining  with  or  replacing  one  atom 
of  hydrogen,  or,  in  other  words,  of  which  the  equivalent 
and  atomic  weight  are  identical  (see  p.  15),  is  termed  a 
monad,  or  is  said  to  be  monovalent.  Thus,  23  grams  of 
sodium  replaces  I  gram  of  hydrogen  in  water  or  in  hydro- 
gen chloride,  to  form  hydroxide  or  chloride  of  sodium ; 
and  as  23  is  known  to  be  the  atomic  weight  of  sodium 
from  determinations  of  its  specific  heat,  the  atomic  weight 
of  sodium  is  expressed  by  the  same  number  as  its  equiva- 
lent. It  is  therefore  a  monad.  The  element  oxygen  is  a 
dyad  or  divalent,  because,  in  water,  two  grams  of  hydrogen 
are  combined  with  1 6  grams  of  oxygen  ;  its  equivalent  is 
therefore  8.  But  oxygen  is  16  times  as  heavy  as  hydro- 
gen— that  is,  a  molecule  of  oxygen  is  16  times  as  heavy  as 
a  molecule  of  hydrogen ;  and  as  a  molecule  of  each  of 
these  substances  is  believed  to  consist  of  two  atoms,  an 
atom  of  oxygen  is  16  times  as  heavy  as  an  atom  of 
hydrogen.  The  atomic  weight  is  therefore  1 6  ;  but  as 

cylinders,  on  which  the  elements  follow  spiral  lines,  so  that  oxygen 
and  fluorine,  sulphur  and  chlorine,  follow  each  other  round  the 
smaller  cylinder,  while  selenium  and  bromine,  tellurium  and  iodine, 
&c. ,  are  conspicuous  round  the  larger  cylinder. 


52  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

the  equivalent  is  8,  the  atomic  weight  is  twice  the  equiva- 
lent. Hence  the  name  "  dyad"  Similarly,  there  are  tri- 
valent  elements,  or  triads  ;  tetravalent  elements,  or  tetrads  ; 
penta*valent  elements,  or  pentads  ;  hexavalent  elements,  or 
hexads  •  heptavalent  elements,  or  heptads  ;  and  possibly  one 
octovalent  element,  or  octad. 

Valency  of  Elements. — As  elements  may  have  more 
than  one  equivalent  (see  p.  15),  so  they  may  have  more 
than  one  valency.  Certain  elements,  however,  so  far  as  is 
known,  possess  only  one  valency ;  examples  of  this  are 
found  in  the  lithium,  the  beryllium,  and  the  boron  columns. 
But  the  majority  of  elements  exhibit  more  than  one  valency, 
according  to  circumstances.  Thus,  compounds  of  nitrogen 
are  known  possessing  the  formulae  NO,  NHg,  NO2,  and 
NH4C1,  in  which  one  atom  of  nitrogen  is  combined  with 
one  atom  of  dyad  oxygen,  and  is  therefore  also  a  dyad ; 
with  three  atoms  of  monad  hydrogen,  and  is  accordingly  a 
triad  ;  with  two  atoms  of  dyad  oxygen,  whence  nitrogen  is 
here  a  tetrad  ;  and  with  four  atoms  of  monad  hydrogen 
and  one  atom  of  monad  chlorine — in  all,  with  five  monads 
— and  in  this  case  nitrogen  must  be  accounted  a  pentad. 
The  atomic  weight  of  nitrogen  is  known  from  its  density 
to  be  14;  and  its  equivalents  in  these  compounds  are 
respectively  ~-9  ^,  ^,  and  ^.  This  peculiarity  makes 
the  classification  of  some  of  the  elements  a  difficult  task. 

But  there  is  an  additional  difficulty  which  meets  us  in 
attempting  to  ascribe  the  valency  to  an  element.  It  is 
connected  with  what  is  known  as  the  "  structure "  of 
compounds.  As  this  subject  will  be  frequently  alluded  to 
in  succeeding  chapters,  enough  will  only  be  said  here  to 
give  an  idea  of  the  problem  which  faces  us  in  attempting  a 
rational  classification  of  the  elements. 

We  are  ignorant  of  the  form  of  the  atoms.  It  is  true 
that  various  speculations  have  been  made  which  may 
possibly  lead  to  a  true  conception  of  their  appearance  and 
motions,  but  these  are  not  sufficiently  definite  and  sup- 
ported by  facts  to  require  more  than  a  passing  allusion 


STRUCTURE  53 

here.  For  all  practical  purposes,  we  are  content,  in 
default  of  a  better  conception,  to  regard  atoms  as  spheres, 
(jfiarck  and  elastic,  and  compounds  as  formed  by  the 
juxtaposition  of  these  spheres.  That  this  conception 
is  far  from  reality  is  more  than  probable,  but  it  has 
to  suffice.  Certain  deductions,  however,  may  be  drawn 
regarding  the  methods  of  combination  of  the  atoms  in  the 
molecule.  It  is  certain  that  molecules  must  occupy  space 
of  three  dimensions  ;  but  just  as  it  is  possible  to  represent 
solid  objects  on  a  plane  surface  by  the  help  of  perspective, 
so  it  is  allowable  to  picture  molecules  as  made  up  of  atoms 
spread  over  a  plane  surface,  until  we  find  facts  which 
demand  space  of  three  dimensions.  We  shall  see  later 
that  in  certain  cases  such  solid  models  of  molecules  are 
necessary,  but,  as  a  rule,  they  can  be  dispensed  with. 
And  instead  of  attempting  to  picture  the  atoms  as  circles 
or  projected  spheres,  the  symbols  alone  will  be  employed. 
The  fact  of  combination  will  be  indicated  by  a  dash  uniting 
the  atoms  ;  thus,  a  monad  will  have  one,  and  only  one, 
dash,  proceeding  from  it  ;  a  dyad,  two  ;  a  triad,  three,  and 
so  on. 

Structural  Formulas.  —  The  simplest  case  which 
we  can  consider  is  that  of  a  compound  consisting  of  two 
monovalent  atoms,  such  as  hydrogen  chloride.  Here  we 
have  the  structural  formula,  H  —  Cl.  A  compound  of  a 
dyad  with  two  monad  atoms,  such  as  water,  or  its  analogue, 
hydrogen  sulphide,  must  have  the  formula,  H  —  O  —  H, 
or  H  —  S  —  H.  The  compound  of  a  triad  with  three 
monad  atoms,  as,  for  example,  ammonia,  would  be  written 

/H 
H  —  N/       ;  and  of  a  tetrad  with  four  monads, 


where  an  atom  of  carbon  is  the  tetrad,  and  the  compound 
is  named  methane,  or  "marsh-gas."  The  atom  of  sulphur 
is,  however,  not  always  divalent  ;  it  is  sometimes  tetra- 
valent,  as  in  its  compounds  with  chlorine  and  with  oxygen. 
In  the  first  case,  tetra-chloride  of  sulphur  has  the  formula, 


54  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

CL         /CI 

78^        ;    and  in  the  latter,   sulphur  dioxide  is  repre- 
CK      \C1 

sented  by  the  formula  O  =  S  =  O.  Sulphur  dioxide  unites 
directly  with  chlorine  on  exposure  of  a  mixture  of  the  two 
gases  to  sunlight,  forming  a  compound  named  sulphuryl 
chloride,  which  has  the  empirical  formula,  SO9C10 ;  in 
this  compound  sulphur  is  regarded  as  a  hexad,  hence  the 

ci        o 

structural  formula  must  be          /$C     *      Now,  sulphuryl 

CK     ^O 

chloride  reacts  at  once  with  water  when  they  are  brought 
into  contact,  and  sulphuric  acid  is  produced  along  with 
hydrogen  chloride.  This  change  can  be  represented 
structurally  by  the  equation  :  — 

H— O— H     Ck        ,O        H-C1     H— Ov        ,O 

H— O— H     Cl/   ^O        H-C1     H— O/    V)' 

The  chlorine  atoms  of  the  sulphuryl  chloride  have  com- 
bined with  two  of  the  hydrogen  atoms  of  two  molecules  of 
water,  leaving  the  residues  — O — H,  which  are  termed 
"  hydroxyl  groups  ;  "  these  have  taken  the  place  of  the 
chlorine  atoms,  forming  sulphuryl  hydroxide,  or,  as  it  is 
commonly  termed,  sulphuric  acid.  If  the  foregoing  repre- 
sentation is  correct,  then  an  intermediate  substance  should 
exist,  which  may  be  named  "  sulphuryl  hydroxy-chloride," 
and  which  should  contain  a  chlorine  atom  and  a  hydroxyl 
group,  each  in  union  with  sulphuryl.  Such  a  body  has  been 
prepared  by  the  direct  union  of  sulphur  trioxide,  where 
sulphur  is  in  combination  with  three  atoms  of  oxygen,  with 
hydrogen  chloride.  But  here  there  must  be  a  transposition 
of  the  hydrogen  atom,  as  is  evident  from  the  equation — 

H  ,,0       H-0V      ^O 

0  =  S;< 

CK 


STRUCTURAL   PROBLEMS  55 

In  a  similar  manner  to  the  above  schemes,  the  relations  of 
the  atoms  in  compounds  may  be  traced  out,  but  sometimes 
it  is  difficult  to  decide  regarding  the  structure.  Here  is  an 
instance.  The  specific  heat  of  the  element  barium  shows 
that  it  possesses  an  atomic  weight  not  far  removed  from 
137  ;  the  analysis  of  its  chloride  leads  to  the  fact  that 
137/2  grams  of  barium  are  in  combination  with  35.5  grams 
of  chlorine,  and  35.5  is  known  to  be  the  equivalent  of 
chlorine;  hence  63.5  is  the  equivalent  of  barium,  and 
63.5x2  =  137  is  its  atomic  weight.  Ordinary  oxide  of 
barium  corresponds  with  this,  for  it  contains  137  grams  of 
barium  in  combination  with  16  grams  of  oxygen ;  hence  we 
accept  barium  as  a  dyad.  But  if  barium  oxide  be  heated  to 
dull  redness  in  a  current  of  oxygen,  another  atom  of  oxygen 
combines  with  the  oxide,  and  in  the  compound  BaO0,  137 
grams  of  barium  are  combined  with  32  grams  of  oxygen. 
Is  barium  a  tetrad  ? 

Among  all  the  numerous  compounds  of  barium,  no  one  is 
known  in  which  one  atom  of  barium  is  combined  with  more 
than  two  atoms  of  a  monad  ;  when  barium  dioxide  is 
treated  with  hydrochloric  acid,  for  example,  two  atoms  of 
oxygen  are  not  replaced  by  four  atoms  of  chlorine,  but  the 
change  is — 

BaO2  +  4HC1  =  BaCl2  4-  H2O2. 

Hydrogen  dioxide  is  produced.  Now  the  formula  of 
hydrogen  dioxide  has  been  proved  by  the  freezing-point 
method  to  be  H2O2,  and  not  HO  ;  hence  it  may  be  sup- 
posed that  it  consists  of  two  hydroxyl  groups  in  union  with 
each  other,  thus  :  H — O — O — H  ;  in  this  case,  barium 

/° 

dioxide  would  be  Ba<^    j  ,  the  two  atoms  of  oxygen  being 


themselves  united  together  ;  and  there  are  many  instances 
of  similar  union.  But  it  may  also  be  held  that  one  of 
the  atoms  of  oxygen  is  a  tetrad,  the  other  remaining  a 


56  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

H\ 
dyad,  thus  :         ;>O=O  ;   whence  barium  dioxide  would  be 

H/ 

Ba=O  =  O.  Both  of  these  views  can  be  supported  by 
arguments,  and  it  is  an  open  question  which  has  a  claim  to 
preference.  It  is  certain,  however,  that  barium  is  not  a 
tetrad. 

In  other  instances,  it  must  be  confessed  that  the  evidence  is 
by  no  means  so  clear,  and  there  is  then  considerable  doubt  as 
regards  the  correct  classification  of  the  elements  concerned. 

It  must  not  be  forgotten  that  we  have  as  yet  no  clear 
conception  as  to  the  cause  of  valency  ;  at  present  we  accept 
the  facts,  and  endeavour  to  use  them  as  a  guide  to  the 
classification  of  compounds. 

Were  all  the  elements  to  be  capable  of  combining  with 
each  other,  it  is  easily  seen  that  the  number  of  compounds 
would  be  prodigious,  and  that  no  mind  could  possibly  hope 
to  grapple  with  them  ;  but  it  happens  that  only  a  certain 
number  of  elements  forms  well-defined  compounds  with  the 
rest,  and  the  grouping  of  compounds  is  thus  not  so  diffi- 
cult a  task  as  might  be  supposed.  The  classes  are  the 
following  : — 

Classification  of  Compounds  : — 

1.  Hydrogen   combines   with   a  few   elements,   forming 
hydrides. 

2.  Fluorine,  chlorine,  bromine,  and  iodine  combine  with 
most   elements,    forming  fluorides,   chlorides,    bromides,    and 
iodides  ;  this  group  of  elements  is  called  the  halogen  group, 
and  their  compounds  are  often  termed  halides. 

3.  Oxygen  and  sulphur  also  combine  with  most  elements, 
and  their  compounds  are  named  oxides  and  sulphides.     The 
comparatively  rare  elements  selenium   and  tellurium   form 
similar  compounds,  named  selenides  and  tellurides. 

A  very  numerous  and  important  class  of  compounds  con- 
sists of  those  in  which  oxygen  is  combined  partly  with 
hydrogen,  partly  with  another  element.  These  compounds 
can  be  divided  into  two  distinct  classes,  according  to  their 


ACIDS  AND   BASES  57 

behaviour  in  aqueous  solution.  Members  of  both  classes 
are  ionised,  but  they  yield  different  ions  according  to  the 
class  to  which  they  belong.  An  example  of  the  first  class 
is  the  compound  H — O — Cl,  known  only  in  solution  in 
water,  for  it  decomposes  when  an  attempt  is  made  to  free  it 
from  water.  The  aqueous  solution  is  only  slightly  ionised, 

+ 

but  the  Jons  present  are  H  and  O — Cl.  The  hydro- 
gen may  be  displaced  by  metals,  forming  "  salts,"  which 
are  also  ionised,  and  indeed  much  more  completely  than 
H— O— Cl.  Thus  we  have  K— O— Cl,  Ca=(O— Cl)2, 

+ 
and  other  similar  salts,  which  are  ionised  in  solution  to  K 

+  + 

and  O — Cl,  and  to  Ca  and  (O — Cl)2  respectively.  Such 
hydroxides  are  named  acids. 

It  appears,  however,  that  elements  which  form  this  class 
of  hydroxide  are,  as  a  rule,  incapable  of  retaining  in  com- 
bination many  hydroxyl  groups  at  a  time  ;  hence  compounds 
of  this  nature  are  generally  mixed  oxides  and  hydroxides. 
It  might,  for  example,  be  imagined  that  triad  nitrogen 
should  be  capable  of  retaining  in  combination  three 

,O— H 
hydroxyl    groups,   to   form    H — O — N<f  ;    but   the 

\0-H 

compound  is  unstable,  and  loses  water,  giving  a  mixed 
hydroxide  and  oxide,  H — O — N=O.  The  ions  in  this 

case  are  H  and  O — N=O.  Another  similar  instance  is 
that  of  sulphuric  acid  ;  as  it  contains  hexad  sulphur,  it 
might  be  supposed  that  the  corresponding  hydroxide  of 
sulphur  would  be  S(OH)6;  but  by  loss  of  two  molecules 

H-O  O 

of  water,  sulphuric  acid  has  the  formula  / 

H— O/ 


as  already  shown.      Its  ions  are  H,  H,  and  SO4,  or  some- 

+ 
times  H  and  HSO4.      The  salts  of  these  acids  are  respec- 


58  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

lively    M— O— N=O    and     (M— O)2=SO4,    where    M' 
stands  for  any  monad  metal. 

Nomenclature  of  Compounds. — The  nomencla- 
ture of  this  class  of  bodies  is  due  to  a  committee  of  which 
Lavoisier  was  a  member.  After  his  discovery  of  the  true 
nature  of  oxygen,  he  was  led,  not  unnaturally,  to  ascribe  to 
it  the  chief  function  in  the  formation  of  compounds,  and  the 
acids  and  salts  were  named  without  introducing  any  syllable 
to  signify  that  oxygen  was  one  of  the  constituents.  In 
general,  the  best  known  or  the  first  discovered  acid  was 
given  a  name  terminating  in  "  ic,"  such  as  "  chloric,"  "  sul- 
phuric," "nitric."  The  salts  of  these  acids  were  termed 
"chlorates,"  "sulphates,"  and  "nitrates."  The  acid  con- 
taining one  atom  of  oxygen  less  was  named  with  the  final 
syllable  "  ous,"  thus  :  "  chlorous  acid,"  "  sulphurous  acid," 
"nitrous  acid;"  and  the  salts  were  termed  "  chlorites," 
"sulphites,"  and  "nitrites."  Acids  containing  still  less 
oxygen  were  named  with  the  prefix  "  hypo,"  thus : 
"  hypochlorous  acid  "  and  "  hypochlorites  ;  "  and  acids  and 
salts  containing  more  oxygen  than  those  which  had  names 
terminating  in  "  ic  "  and  "ate"  were  distinguished  by  the 
prefix  "per,"  thus:  "perchloric,"  "  persulphuric  "  acids, 
forming  "  perchlorates  "  and  "  persulphates."  This  no- 
menclature is  still  retained.  It  is  illustrated  in  the  table 
which  follows  : — 

Hypochlorous  acid,     .  .  .  HOC1. 

Chlorous  acid,     .  .  .  HOC1O. 

Chloric  acid,        .  .  .  HOC1O2. 

Perchloric  acid,   ....  HOC1O3. 

Potassium  hypochloritc,  .  .  KOC1. 

chlorite,  .  .  KOC1O. 

chlorate,  .  .  KOC1O,. 

perchlorate,  .  .  KOCIO^. 

The  second  class  of  hydroxides  is  named  "  hydroxides." 
Members  of  this  class,  however,  yield  ions,  one  of  which  is 


ACIDS   AND   BASES  59 

always  hydroxyl,  OH.  As  examples,  we  may  select 
sodium  hydroxide,  Na— O— H,  and  calcium  hydroxide, 
Ca=(O — H)0.  Here  solutions  of  these  compounds  in 

+  +  + 

water  contain  the  ions  Na  and  OH,  and  Ca  and  (OH)2. 
Such  hydroxides  are  termed  bases ;  but  the  name  is  also 
indiscriminately  applied  to  oxides  when  they  unite  with 
water  to  form  bases.  Thus  CuO  and  Cu(OH)2  are  each 
termed  bases. 

The  same  elements  may  sometimes  form  bases  and  acids, 
according  to  the  valency.  The  element  chromium  is  an 
instance.  Chromous  oxide  has  the  formula  Cr^O,  cor- 
responding to  the  chloride  Cr=Cl.? ;  the  hydroxide  is  ana- 
logous with  the  chloride,  and  has  the  formula  Cr=(OH)2. 
But  there  is  also  an  oxide,  CrOg,  where  chromium  is  a 
hexad ;  the  hydroxide  is  not  known,  but  the  acid  is  like 

H-O  O 

sulphuric  acid  in  formula,  viz.,  /Cr/      .     This  is  an 

H-O/    ^o 

instance  of  the  rule,  of  very  wide  application,  that  the 
character  of  a  compound  is  influenced  both  by  the  nature  of 
the  elements  contained  in  it,  as  well  as  by  its  structure  and 
the  valency  of  these  elements. 

Sulphur,  and  in  a  less  degree  selenium  and  tellurium, 
resemble  oxygen  in  forming  salts  of  nature  similar  to  these 
described,  as  well  as  acids  and  bodies  analogous  to  hydrox- 
ides. The  nomenclature  follows  that  of  the  oxides,  except 
that  the  syllables  "sulpho"  or  "  thio  "  are  interposed  for 
the  sulphur  compounds.  Thus  we  have  a  carbonate, 
K0CO3,  and  a  sulpho-  or  thiocarbonate,  K2CS3.  In  the 
somewhat  rare  cases  where  selenium  or  tellurium  play  a 
similar  part,  the  words  "  selenio- "  or  "  telluric- "  are 
interposed.  Compounds  analogous  to  the  hydroxides  are 
termed  "  hydrosulphides,"  "  hydroselenides,"  or  "  hydro- 
tellurides." 

4.  Compounds  of  nitrogen,  phosphorus,  arsenic,  and 
antimony,  with  other  elements,  are  termed  nitrides^  phos- 


60  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 


arsenides^  and  antimonides  .  And  just  as  double 
oxides  of  hydrogen  and  other  elements  exist,  so  too  nitrides 
of  hydrogen  and  other  elements  are  known.  The  compound 
of  nitrogen  and  hydrogen,  ammonia,  which  has  the  formula 
NH3,  unites  with  acids,  forming  salts.  For  example, 
ammonium  chloride,  NH4C1,  is  produced  by  the  direct 
union  of  ammonia,  NH3,  with  hydrogen  chloride,  HC1, 
if  a  trace  of  moisture  is  present.  In  aqueous  solution  it 

+ 

undergoes  partial  ionisation,  and  the  ions  are  NH4  and  Cl. 
In  this  it  resembles  sodium  chloride,  NaCl,  and  the  name 
"ammonium"  has  been  devised  to  exhibit  this  similarity. 
When  ammonium  chloride  or  similar  compounds  are  formed 
by  the  union  of  ammonia  with  acids,  it  is  believed  that  the 
nitrogen  atom  changes  its  valency  from  triad  to  pentad, 

^H2 

thus:  H-N=H2  and  Cl-N^f      . 

^H 

.2 

Even  in  "  substituted  ammonias,"  this  property  of  com- 
bining with  acids  is  distinctive.  For  example,  copper 
chloride,  CuCl9,  unites  directly  with  ammonia,  giving 
Cu=(NH2)22HCl  or  Cu=(NH3)2Cl2.  It  will  be  seen 
that  the  atom  of  dyad  copper  has  replaced  two  atoms 
of  monad  hydrogen  in  two  molecules  of  ammonium 
chloride. 

It  is  possible,  too,  for  a  group  of  elements  to  replace  the 
hydrogen  of  ammonia,  just  as  it  is  possible  for  a  group  to 
take  the  place  of  the  hydrogen  of  water.  Referring  back 
to  the  formula  of  sulphuric  acid,  H2SO4,  it  is  plain  that  it 
may  be  written  SO2=(OH)2,  and  regarded  as  two  mole- 
cules of  water,  in  which  two  atoms  of  hydrogen  have  been 
replaced  by  the  dyad  group,  SO2.  This  is  identical  with 
the  structural  formula  already  given  on  p.  54.  So,  too, 
with  nitrogen;  the  compound  SO2=(NH0)2  is  also  known, 
and  it  may  be  regarded  as  derived  from  two  molecules  of 
ammonia  by  the  replacement  of  two  atoms  of  hydrogen  by 
the  dyad  group,  SO9". 


CARBIDES  AND   SILICIDES  61 

Compounds  of  phosphorus,  arsenic,  and  antimony  after 
this  pattern  are  not  known. 

5.  Compounds  of  carbon  and  silicon  with  other  elements 
are  termed  carbides  and  silicides.  The  carbides  are  extra- 
ordinarily numerous  owing  to  the  power  possessed  by  carbon 
of  forming  compounds  in  which  two  or  more  atoms  of  car- 
bon are  in  combination  with  each  other.  We  have  seen 
that  a  molecule  of  hydrogen  consists  of  two  atoms  ;  a  mole- 
cule of  oxygen  also  consists  of  two  atoms  ;  but  we  know  of 
no  compounds  of  oxygen  in  which  more  than  three  atoms 
of  oxygen  are  in  combination  with  each  other.  With 
carbon,  however,  the  case  is  different.  Considering 
the  combination  with  hydrogen  alone,  we  have  not 

H  H 


only    CH4,    but    H3C-CH3,   H8C-C-C-CH8,   in    all 

H  H 

of  which  the  element  carbon  is  a  tetrad,  being  either  in 
combination  with  hydrogen  or  with  another  atom  of  carbon. 
And  these  compounds  may  have  their  hydrogen  replaced 
by  other  elements  ;  for  example,  an  atom  of  chlorine  may 
take  the  place  of  an  atom  of  hydrogen  in  any  one  of  these 
compounds,  or  one  or  more  atoms  of  hydrogen  may  be  re- 
placed by  groups  of  hydroxyl,  — OH,  or  two  atoms  of 
monad  hydrogen  may  be  replaced  by  an  atom  of  dyad 
oxygen,  or  three  atoms  by  one  of  triad  nitrogen,  and  so  on. 
This  makes  the  chemistry  of  the  carbon  compounds  very 
complicated,  but  at  the  same  time  it  affords  the  means 
whereby  the  numerous  constituent  compounds  of  the  tissue 
of  plants  and  animals  can  be  built  up,  for  they  consist,  for 
the  most  part,  of  carbon  compounds,  containing  at  the  same 
time  other  elements  in  combination  with  the  carbon  atoms. 
This  branch  of  chemistry  is  commonly  termed  "  Organic 
Chemistry,"  and  treated  separately. 

6.  Many  elements  of  the  metallic  class,  such  as  iron, 
lead,  copper,  sodium,  &c.,  form  compounds  with  each 
other.  These  compounds  are  usually  named  "alloys;" 


62  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

but  it  must  be  mentioned  that  the  name  "  alloy  "  is  often 
applied  to  solid  mixtures  of  the  metals  where  no  actual 
compound  exists. 

Such  are  the  classes  into  which  chemical  compounds  may 
be  divided.  In  a  short  sketch  like  the  present,  it  is,  of 
course,  impossible  to  do  more  than  consider  a  few  of  these 
compounds,  and  those  will  be  chosen  which  are  best  adapted 
to  illustrate  the  nature  of  the  various  groups,  They  will  be 
considered  in  the  second  volume. 


CHAPTER  V 

Methods  of  Determining  the  Equivalents  of  the 
Elements — Of  Ascertaining  their  Molecular 
Weights — Allotropy.  • 

THE  meaning  of  the  word  "  equivalent "  has  already  been 
explained  on  p.  15,  and  we  shall  now  consider  how  the 
equivalent  of  an  element  may  be  determined.  As  already 
stated,  some  compound  of  the  element  is  analysed,  prefer- 
ably one  with  hydrogen,  oxygen,  or  chlorine,  and  the 
weight  of  the  element  which  is  in  combination  with,  or 
which  replaces  8  parts  by  weight  of  oxygen,  is  termed 
the  equivalent  of  the  element.  But  it  is  seldom  that  a 
direct  method  of  estimating  the  equivalent  can  be  practised, 
for  it  is  not  always  possible  to  obtain  a  compound  of  the 
element  with  hydrogen,  or  to  deprive  its  oxide  of  oxygen, 
or  its  chloride  of  chlorine.  In  fact,  each  element  has  to- 
be  specially  studied,  and  a  method  devised  which  will  lead 
to  the  required  information.  It  is,  above  all,  necessary 
that  the  compounds  dealt  with  shall  be  pure — that  is,  that 
they  shall  not  contain  any  other  elements  than  those  which 
it  is  desired  to  estimate,  and  that  their  composition  shall  be 
definite.  For  instance,  if  it  were  desired  to  find  the  equiva- 
lent of  barium  by  estimating  the  proportion  of  chlorine  in 
its  chloride,  it  would  be  essential  to  obtain  barium  chloride 
free  from  the  very  similar  elements  calcium  and  strontium, 
and  it  would  also  be  of  the  first  importance  to  make  sure 
that  in  weighing  the  chloride,  the  specimen  should  be  free 
from  water  adhering  to  the  powdered  substance. 
63 


64  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

Methods  of  Determining  the  Equivalents  of 
Elements. — It  is  not  always  necessary  to  determine  both 
constituents  of  the  compound ;  for  example,  the  ratio  of 
silver  to  chlorine  can  be  found  by  dissolving  a  known 
weight  of  pure  silver  in  nitric  acid,  and  then  adding  to  the 
solution  some  soluble  chloride,  such  as  hydrogen  chloride  ; 
silver  chloride  is  then  precipitated  thus  : — 

AgNO3.  Aq.  +  NH4CLAq.  -  AgCl  +  NH4NO3.  Aq. 

The  silver  chloride  is  collected  on  a  filter,  thoroughly 
washed,  and  after  being  dried,  weighed.  The  Belgian 
chemist,  Stas,  working  in  this  way,  obtained  from  108.579 
grams  of  silver  144.207  grams  of  silver  chloride.  The 
relation  between  the  atomic  weight  of  oxygen,  taken  as 
the  standard  and  placed  equal  to  16,  and  the  formula- 
weight  of  silver  chloride  was  ascertained  by  heating  to 
redness  138.789  grams  of  silver  chlorate,  2AgClO3  = 
2AgCl  +  3O9;  the  weight  of  the  residual  silver  chloride 
was  103.9795  grams,  and  that  of  the  oxygen  evolved 
taken  as  difference  is  34.8095.  The  proportion — 

Oxygen  Silver  chloride  Q  Formula  weight 

lost.  remaining.  of  AgCl. 

34.8095     :      103.9795      ::      48        :        i43-38l7 

gives  the  formula  weight  of  silver  chloride.  The  pro- 
portion of  silver  it  contains  is  found  by  the  equation — 

144.207  :  108.579  ::  i43-38l7  :  TO7-9583 

Subtracting  from  143.3817  the  weight  of  the  silver  it 
contains,  107.9583,  the  remainder  is  the  atomic  weight 
of  chlorine,  which,  for  reasons  already  given,  is  identical 
with  its  equivalent,  namely,  35.4234;  and  107.96  is  the 
equivalent  of  silver. 

Knowing  these  facts,  the  atomic  weight  of,  say,  barium 
may  be  determined  by  dissolving  a  known  weight  of  its 
chloride  in  water,  and  adding  to  the  solution  a  solution 


ATOMIC  WEIGHTS  65 

of  silver  nitrate,  so  as  to  obtain  a  precipitate  of  silver 
chloride,  which  can  be  weighed,  and  from  it  the  weight 
of  the  chlorine  in  the  barium  chloride  deduced.  Sub- 
tracting this  from  the  weight  of  the  barium  chloride  taken, 
the  remainder  is  the  equivalent  of  barium.  To  determine 
whether  or  not  this  number  is  identical  with  its  atomic 
weight,  a  determination  of  its  specific  heat  must  be  made, 
as  described  on  p.  14. 

In  some  instances  the  process  is  a  more  direct  one.  To 
determine  the  equivalent  of  nickel,  a  weighed  quantity  of 
the  metal  has  been  heated  in  oxygen,  and  the  gain  in 
weight  noted.  Then,  as  this  weight  is  to  the  weight  of 
nickel  taken,  so  is  the  equivalent  of  oxygen  to  that  of 
nickel. 

These  examples  will  suffice  to  give  a  general  idea  of  the 
processes  used  in  determining  atomic  weights,  though,  as 
before  stated,  each  element  requires  special  treatment,  and 
the  selection  of  the  best  method  is  often  a  very  difficult 
task.  It  is  usual,  moreover,  to  make  determinations  by 
several  methods,  if  that  be  possible,  so  as  to  avoid  any 
permanent  source  of  error.  Many  observers,  too,  have 
made  such  determinations,  and  it  is  not  always  easy  to 
eliminate  a  personal  element  from  the  results  which  they  give. 
A  committee  of  the  German  Chemical  Society  has  recently 
published  a  table  of  atomic  weights,  reproduced  below  (with 
a  few  alterations  and  additions),  in  which  the  last  digit  of 
each  number  may  in  all  probability  be  accepted  as  correct. 
A  second  column  is  added,  containing  the  atomic  volumes 
of  the  elements,  so  far  as  they  are  known.  They  represent 
the  volumes  in  cubic  centimeters  occupied  by  the  atomic 
weight  of  the  element  taken  in  grams,  thus — 197.2  grams 
of  gold  occupy  10.2  cubic  centimeters.  As  the  elements 
expand  on  rise  of  temperature,  these  results  are  not  always 
comparative,  but  at  present  they  are  the  best  that  can  be 
obtained. 


66  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 


Table  of  Atomic  Weights  and  Atomic  Volumes. 

Atomic  Atomic 

Weight.  Volume. 

Aluminium  .  Al  27.1  10.  i 

Antimony.  .      Sb  120  17.9 

Argon        .  .     A  39.9  32.9 

Arsenic     .  .     As  75  13.3 

Barium       .  .  .      Ba  137.1 

Beryllium  .  .  .Be            9.1  4.3 

Bismuth     .  .  Bi  208.5  2T.2 

Boron        .  .  .     B  n.o  4.1 

Bromine    .  .  Br  79-96  25.1 

Cadmium  .  .  .      Cd  112  13.0 

Caesium      ,  .  Cs  133 

Calcium     .  .  Ca  40  25.3 

Carbon      .  .     C  12.00  3.4 

Cerium       .  .  Ce  140  20.8 

Chlorine    .  .  .      Cl  35-45 

Chromium  .  .      Cr  52.1  7.7 

Cobalt        .  .  .Co  59.0  6.7 

Copper       .  .  .      Cu  63.6  7.1 

Erbium      .  .  .     Er  166  ? 

Fluorine    .  .  F            19 

Gadolinium  .  .      Gd  156 

Gallium     .  .  .      Ga  70  u.8 

Germanium  .  .      Ge  72 

Gold          .  .  .     Au  197.2  10.2 

Helium      .  .  .     He           4 

Hydrogen.  .  .      H              1.007 

Indium       .  .  .In  114  25«7 

Iridium      .  .  Ir  I93-c  8.6 

Iodine        .  .  .1  126.85  25.7 

Iron           .  .  .     Fe  56.0  6.6 

Krypton    .  .  .  81.5  37.8 

Lanthanum  .  .     La  138  22.9 


ATOMIC  WEIGHTS  67 

Atomic  Atomic 

Weight.  Volume. 

Lead          .  .  .  Pb  206.9  18.2 

Lithium     .  .  .Li            7.03  11.9 

Magnesium  .  .  Mg         24.36  13.3 

Manganese  .  .  Mn         55.0  7.7 

Mercury    .  .  .  Hg  200.3  T4*8 

Molybdenum  .  .  Mo        96.0 

Neodymium  .  .  Nd  143.5 

Neon          .  .  .  Ne          20 

Nickel        .  .  Ni          58.7  6.7 

Niobium     .  .  .  Nb         94  14.5 

Nitrogen    .  .  N            14-04 

Osmium     .  .  Os  191  8.9 

Oxygen     .  .  .  O            16.000  (standard). 

Palladium  .  .  .  Pd  106  9.3 

Phosphorus  .  .  P            31.0  17.0 

Platinum    .  .  .  Pt  195.2  9.1 

Potassium.  .  .  K           39«I4  45«5 

Praseodymium  .  .  Pr  141 

Rhodium   .  .  .  Rh  103.0  9.5 

Rubidium  .  .  .  Rb         85.4  56.3 

Ruthenium  .  .  Ru  101.7  9.2 

Samarium  .  .  .  Sm  150 

Scandium  .  .  Sc          44 

Selenium    .  .  .  Se          79.1  18.5 

Silicon        .  .  .Si           28.4  11.4 

Silver         .  .  .  Ag  107.93  10.3 

Sodium      .  .  .  Na         23.05  23.7 

Strontium  .  .  Sr           87.6  34.5 

Sulphur      .  .  .  S            32.06  15.7 

Tantalum  .  .  .  Ta  183  17.0 

Tellurium.  .  .  Te  127.6  20.3 

Thallium  .  .  .  Tl  204.1  17.2 

Thorium    .  .  .  Th  232  29.8 

Thulium    .  .  .  Tu  170? 

Tin  .          .  .  .  Sn  1 19.0  16.2 


68  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

Atomic  Atomic 

•  Weight.  Volume. 

Titanium    .  .  .      Ti          48.1 

Tungsten   .  .  .     W  184  9.6 

Uranium    .  .                U  240  13.0 

Vanadium.  .  .V            51.2  9.3 

Xenon        .  .  .X  128  35.9 

Ytterbium.  .  .     Yb  173 

Yttrium      .  .  .     Y  89 

Zinc           .  .  .     Zn         65.4  9.5 

Zirconium  .  .     Zr          90.6  21.9 

Molecular    Weights    of    the    Elements. — The 

molecular  weights  of  some  of  the  elements  have  been 
successfully  determined ;  in  certain  cases  by  their  density 
in  the  gaseous  state,  in  others  by  the  lowering  of  the 
vapour-pressure  of  mercury,  caused  by  the  presence  of  a 
known  weight  of  a  dissolved  metal,  and  again  in  others  by 
the  depression  of  the  freezing-point  of  certain  metals,  caused 
by  the  presence  of  others  in  known  amount.  These  will 
be  considered  in  their  order. 

(a)  Vapour- densities. — For  reasons  already  explained 
on  page  13,  a  molecule  of  oxygen  is  believed  to  contain  two 
atoms,  and  inasmuch  as  the  equivalents  of  most  elements 
have  been  determined  with  reference  to  oxygen,  by  analysis 
or  by  synthesis  of  their  oxides  or  of  their  chlorides,  and 
as  the  ratio  of  the  equivalent  of  chlorine  to  that  of  oxygen 
has  been  very  accurately  determined,  it  has  been  agreed  to 
refer  the  atomic  weights  of  the  elements  to  the  standard 
of  oxygen  instead  of  to  that  of  hydrogen.  But  the  atomic 
weight  of  oxygen  is  assumed  as  16,  and  the  same  standard 
is  applied  to  the  densities  of  gases;  instead  of  referring  them 
to  the  standard  of  H  =  I,  they  are  referred  to  O  =  16.  To 
find  the  molecular  weights,  the  number  expressing  the 
density  must  be  doubled  in  order  to  compare  with  the 
molecular  weight  of  oxygen,  which  is  32. 

Hydrogen. — The  density  referred  to  this  standard  is 


MOLECULAR  WEIGHTS  69 

i. 006  or  1.007.  There  is  not  yet  an  absolute  certainty, 
but  it  is  clear  that  the  molecular  weight  of  hydrogen  must 
be  approximately  2,  i.e.  the  molecule  is  di-atomic. 

Nitrogen. — Lord  Rayleigh  found  the  density  of  nitrogen 
to  be  14.001  ;  its  molecular  weight  is  therefore  28,  and  its 
formula  N2. 

Oxygen. — Taken  as  16;  formula  O2.  As  these  gases 
keep  their  relative  densities  up  to  a  temperature  of  1700°, 
it  is  to  be  presumed  that  they  all  remain  diatomic,  for  it  is 
much  more  likely  that  no  one  of  them  dissociates  than  that 
all  dissociate  to  an  equal  extent  on  rise  of  temperature. 
The  case  is  different  with  fluorine,  chlorine,  bromine, 
and  iodine.  The  density  of  fluorine  at  atmospheric  tem- 
perature is  18.3;  the  theoretical  density  for  F2  is  19.  It 
follows,  therefore,  that  fluorine  must  consist  of  a  mixture 
of  monatomic  and  diatomic  molecules.  Now,  19  is  the 
molecular  weight  of  FI,  for  the  atom  and  the  molecule  are 
identical,  and  38  that  of  F2  ;  and  the  gas  must  contain 
x  molecules  of  FI+(I— x)  molecules  of  F2.  Hence, 
19x4-  38(1  —  x)  =  18.3  x  2  ;  and  x  =  0.073,  *•*•  'in  every 
1000  molecules  of  the  gas  there  are  73  molecules  of  Fj 
and  927  molecules  of  F2. 

Chlorine  at  200°  was  found  to  have  the  density  35.45, 
the  same  as  its  atomic  weight,  but  at  1000°  the  density 
was  27.06,  and  at  1560°  23.3.  At  low  temperatures, 
therefore,  the  formula  of  chlorine  is  C12,  but  at  1560°  the 
gas  consists  of  61  per  cent,  of  molecules  of  CIr  Similar 
results  have  been  found  for  bromine,  and  for  iodine,  which 
also  has  the  formula  I0  at  low  temperatures,  the  density 
was  found  to  be  63.7,  corresponding  to  the  molecular 
weight  127.4  at  1500°  under  low  pressure ;  for  reducing 
the  pressure  also  increases  dissociation.  As  the  atomic 
weight  of  iodine  is  126.85, tne  £as  at  I5°°°  consists  almost 
entirely  of  molecules  of  Ir 

Thallium  has  been  weighed  as  gas  at  1730° ;  the  density 
was  206.2,  a  sufficient  approximation  to  204.1  to  warrant 
the  conclusion  that  its  molecule  is  diatomic. 


70  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

Bismuth  at  1640°  gave  the  density  146.5,  showing,  as 
its  atomic  weight  is  208.5,  a  Partial  dissociation  from  Bi0 
to  Bi-p 

Phosphorus  and  arsenic  give  densities  which  indicate 
the  presence  in  their  gases  of  more  complicated  molecules. 
At  313°  the  density  of  phosphorus  gas  is  64,  and  there 
is  a  gradual  decrease  with  rise  of  temperature,  until  at  1708° 
the  density  is  45.6.  As  the  atomic  weight  of  phosphorus 
is  31.0,  the  density  62  would  correspond  to  the  existence 
of  molecules  of  P4,  while  at  1708°  there  must  be  a  con- 
siderable admixture  of  molecules  of  a  smaller  complexity, 
probably  P£.  Arsenic  gas  had  the  density  154.2  at  644°, 
and  79.5  at  1700°;  the  atomic  weight  of  arsenic  being  75, 
the  density  150  would  correspond  to  the  formula  As4,  and 
at  1700°  the  molecules  are  almost  all  As2,  only  a  small 
admixture  of  molecules  of  As4  remaining  undecomposed. 
The  density  of  antimony  gas,  141.5  at  1640°,  implies  the 
presence  of  some  molecules  of  Sb4  among  many  molecules 
of  Sb2,  for  the  atomic  weight  is  120. 

The  elements  sulphur,  selenium,  and  tellurium  show 
signs  of  even  greater  molecular  complexity.  Dumas  found 
the  density  of  sulphur  gas  at  500°  to  be  94.8  ;  now,  the  atomic 
weight  of  sulphur  is  32.08,  and  96  is  32  x  3  ;  hence,  it 
was  for  long  supposed  that  a  molecule  of  gaseous  sulphur 
consisted  of  6  atoms ;  but  it  has  been  recently  found  that 
at  193°,  of  course  under  a  very  small  pressure,  2.1  mms. 
(for  the  boiling-point  of  sulphur  at  normal  pressure  is  446°), 
the  density  reached  the  high  number  125.5  5  now>  32  x  4  is 
128,  and  it  must  be  concluded  that  the  molecular  weight 
of  sulphur  in  the  gaseous  state  is  256,  and  its  formula  at 
low  temperatures  Sg.  At  800°  its  formula  is  S9,  and  at 
1719°  the  density  31.8  was  found,  showing  no  sign  of 
further  molecular  simplification.  Selenium,  of  which  the 
atomic  weight  is  79.1,  has  the  density  1 1 1  at  860°,  imply- 
ing some  molecular  complexity,  and  at  1420°  the  density 
is  reduced  to  82.2,  corresponding  to  the  formula  Se.2 ; 
and  tellurium,  at  about  1400°,  has  the  gaseous  density  130; 


MOLECULAR  WEIGHTS  71 

it  appears,  therefore,  to  consist  of  molecules  of  Te9,  since 
its  atomic  weight  is  127.6. 

These  examples  show  that  the  molecules  of  many  ele- 
ments in  the  gaseous  state  are  more  or  less  complex.  It  is 
probable  that  sulphur,  selenium,  and  tellurium  would  exist 
as  octo-atomic  molecules  could  the  temperature  be  suffi- 
ciently reduced  ;  even  with  sulphur  at  its  boiling-point  under 
normal  pressure,  the  temperature  is  so  high  that  many  of 
these  complex  molecules  are  already  decomposed.  Proba- 
bility is  also  in  favour  of  the  supposition  that  elements  of 
the  phosphorus  group,  phosphorus,  arsenic,  antimony,  and 
possibly  bismuth,  have  molecules  consisting  of  4  atoms  ; 
these  too  dissociating  with  rise  of  temperature  into  di-atomic 
molecules.  Oxygen,  nitrogen,  and  hydrogen  consist  of 
di-atomic  molecules,  no  sign  of  dissociation  having  been 
remarked  even  at  the  highest  attainable  temperatures;  but 
fluorine,  though  consisting  mostly  of  di-atomic  molecules, 
contains  some  mono-atomic  ones  ;  and  chlorine,  bromine, 
and  iodine,  though  probably  CJ9,  Br2,  and  I2  at  low 
temperatures,  dissociate  into  molecules  identical  with  their 
atoms  if  the  temperature  is  sufficiently  raised.  The  fact  of 
reduction  in  the  molecular  complexity  of  the  molecules  of 
elements  prepares  us  for  the  existence  of  elements  which  in 
the  gaseous  state  are  already  mono-atomic  ;  and  many  such 
are  known. 

Mono-atomic  Cad- 
elements.  Sodium.    Potassium.   Zinc.    mium.         Mercury. 
Gas-density  12.7              18.8         3415     57-oi            100.94 
Temperature  Red  heat     Red  heat     1400°     1040°  446°  and  1730° 
Atomic  weights  23.05            39-!4       65.4     112.0              200.3 
Density  x  2  25.4              37.6         68.3     114.02             201.88 

The  presumption  from  these  numbers  is  that  the 
elements  are  all  mono-atomic.  It  must  be  remembered 
that  their  specific  heats  all  point  to  the  atomic  weights 
given. 

There  is,  however,  another  argument  for  the  mono- 
atomicity  of  gaseous  mercury.  On  the  assumption  of  the 


72  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

"  kinetic  theory  of  gases,"  that  the  pressure  of  a  gas  on  the 
walls  of  the  vessel  containing  it  is  due  to  the  bombardment  of 
the  sides  by  repeated  and  enormously  numerous  impacts  of 
the  molecules,  it  can  be  calculated  that  the  amount  of  heat 
necessary  to  raise  the  temperature  of  the  molecular  weight 
expressed  in  grams  of  an  ideal  gas  the  molecules  of  which 
are  supposed  to  be  hard  smooth  elastic  spheres,  must  be  3 
calories,  provided  the  gas  be  not  allowed  to  expand.  If, 
however,  it  be  allowed  to  expand,  it  will  cool  itself,  and 
more  heat  must  be  added  to  restore  the  temperature ;  this 
extra  amount  of  heat  is  two  additional  calories.  To  heat 
the  molecular  weight  of  the  gas  in  grams  through  I  °,  allow- 
ing it  to  expand  at  constant  pressure,  requires  therefore  5 
calories.  The  " molecular  heat  at  constant  volume"  is 
thus  3  calories;  the  "molecular  heat  at  constant  pressure" 
is  5  calories.  The  ratio  between  the  two  is  3  :  5,  or 
I  :  1.66.  This  has  been  found  to  be  the  case  for  mercury 
gas,  the  mono-atomicity  of  whose  molecule  is  proved  on 
other  grounds ;  and  the  inactive  gases  of  the  atmosphere, 
helium,  neon,  argon,  krypton,  and  xenon,  exhibit  the  same 
ratio  between  their  atomic  heats.  It  therefore  follows  that 
the  atoms  of  these  gases  are  also  identical  with  their  mole- 
cules ;  and  that  their  atomic  weights  are  to  be  deduced  from 
their  densities  by  doubling  the  numbers  representing  the 
latter.  Confirmatory  of  this  view,  the  ratio  between  the 
molecular  heats  of  oxygen,  hydrogen,  nitrogen,  and  gases 
which  are  known  to  be  di-atomic,  like  NO,  CO,  &c.,  is  as 
5  :  7  or  i  :  1.4.  Such  gases  require  more  heat  to  raise 
their  temperature  than  an  equal  number  of  molecules  of  the 
mono-atomic  gases  do  ;  the  reason  is,  that  the  heat  applied 
to  di-  or  poly-atomic  gases  is  used,  not  merely  in  transport- 
ing the  atoms  from  place  to  place  and  raising  pressure  by 
causing  them  to  bombard  the  walls  of  the  containing  vessel, 
but  some  heat  is  required  to  cause  the  atoms  to  move  within 
the  molecule,  in  some  rotatory  or  vibratory  manner  ;  and 
consistently  with  this  it  has  been  found  that  gases  consisting 
of  a  greater  number  of  atoms  in  the  molecule  require  still 


MOLECULAR  WEIGHTS  73 

more  heat  to  raise  the  temperature  of  weights  proportional  to 
their  molecular  weights  ;  in  other  words,  their  molecular 
heats  at  constant  volume  are  higher  the  greater  the  number 
of  atoms  in  the  molecule. 

For  these  reasons  the  densities  of  the  inactive  gases  must 
be  multiplied  by  2  to  obtain  their  atomic  weights.  The 
data  are : — 

Helium.  Neon.  Argon.  Krypton.  Xenon. 

Densities                             2                10  20              41  64 
Atomic  and 

molecular  weights          4               20  40              82  128 

(£)  Lowering  of  Freezing-Point,  or  Lowering  of 
Vapour-Pressure  of  Solvent. — The  molecular  weights 
of  some  of  the  elements  have  been  determined  by  Raoult's 
method,  either  by  the  lowering  of  the  vapour-pressure 
of  mercury,  or  by  the  depression  in  the  freezing-point 
of  some  other  metal  or  solvent  in  which  the  element  has 
been  dissolved.  Lithium,  sodium,  potassium,  calcium, 
barium,  magnesium,  cadmium,  gallium,  thallium,  manganese, 
silver,  and  gold  appear  to  be  mono-atomic,  while  tin,  lead, 
aluminium,  antimony,  and  bismuth  show  tendency  in  con- 
centrated solution  to  associate  to  di-atomic  molecules. 
These  results  were  obtained  by  measuring  the  lowering  of 
vapour- pressure  of  mercury  produced  by  known  weight  of 
the  metals  named.  By  measurement  of  the  depression  in 
the  freezing-point  of  tin,  in  which  metals  were  dissolved, 
zinc,  copper,  silver,  cadmium,  lead,  and  mercury  appeared 
to  be  mono-atomic,  while  aluminium  was  found  to  be  di- 
atomic. These  results,  however,  are  not  to  be  regarded 
with  the  same  confidence  as  those  obtained  by  means  of 
measurements  of  the  vapour-density,  for  it  is  not  certain 
whether  the  molecular  weight  of  the  solvent  should  be  taken 
as  identical  with  its  atomic  weight.  All  that  can  be  certainly 
affirmed  is,  that  the  molecular  weights  of  the  elements  which 
have  been  placed  in  the  same  class  above  correspond  to 
formulas  with  the  same  number  of  atoms  in  the  molecule. 
Thus,  if  zinc  is  mono-atomic,  so  is  cadmium  ;  if  di-atomic, 


74  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

cadmium  has  also  a  di-atomic  molecule ;  and  similarly  with 
the  rest. 

A  method  has  also  been  devised,  depending  on  the  capil- 
lary rise  of  liquids  in  narrow  tubes,  by  means  of  which  it  is 
possible  to  estimate  the  molecular  complexity  of  liquids. 
This  method  is  applicable  to  only  a  few  elements ;  but  by 
its  use  it  has  been  found  that  in  the  liquid  state  bromine 
consists  chiefly  of  di-atomic  molecules  mixed  with  a  few 
tetra-tomic  molecules  ;  and  that  phosphorus  in  the  liquid, 
as  in  the  gaseous  condition,  forms  molecules  corresponding 
to  the  formula  P4. 

Allotropy. — Closely  connected  with  this  question  is 
the  phenomenon  of  allotropy.  This  word,  which  signifies 
"  other  form,"  is  applied  to  the  existence  of  elements  in 
more  than  one  condition.  Thus  phosphorus,  which  is 
usually  a  yellow,  waxy  substance,  with  a  low  melting- 
point,  changes  its  appearance  when  heated,  and  becomes 
converted  into  a  red  amorphous  powder,  insoluble  in  the 
usual  solvents  for  phosphorus,  such  as  carbon  disulphide, 
and  melting  at  a  much  higher  temperature  than  the  yellow 
variety ;  moreover,  the  red  form  is  much  less  easily  in- 
flamed than  the  yellow  form.  These  two  forms  are  said 
to  be  allotropic,  and  the  element  is  said  to  display  allo- 
tropy. 

The  elements  which  display  allotropy  are : — carbon, 
silicon,  tin,  phosphorus,  arsenic,  antimony,  oxygen,  sulphur, 
selenium,  iridium,  ruthenium,  rhodium,  silver,  gold,  and 
iron.  These  will  be  considered  in  their  order. 

Carbon. — Diamonds,  as  was  discovered  by  Lavoisier, 
yield  on  combustion  nothing  but  carbon  dioxide ;  their 
identity  with  carbon  was  thus  proved.  When  pure,  they 
are  colourless  ;  they  are  the  hardest  of  all  known  sub- 
stances, and  possess  a  density  of  3.514  at  18°.  When 
heated  in  absence  of  air  in  an  electric  arc,  a  diamond 
changes  to  a  coke-like  black  substance.  Diamonds  of 
any  appreciable  size  have  not  been  formed  artificially,  but 
minute  diamonds  have  been  made  by  Moissan  by  dissolving 


ALLOTROPY  OF   CARBON  75 

carbon  in  molten  iron  heated  to  its  boiling-point  in  an 
electric  furnace,  and  then  suddenly  cooling  the  iron  by 
plunging  it  into  molten  lead;  the  external  surface  of  the 
iron  solidifies,  and  encloses  a  molten  interior.  As  iron 
possesses  a  greater  volume  in  the  solid  than  in  the  liquid 
state,  the  molten  iron,  containing  carbon  in  solution,  when 
it  solidifies  is  under  great  pressure,  for  it  is  confined  and 
hindered  from  expanding  by  the  crust  of  solid  iron  ;  under 
this  pressure  the  carbon  separates  out  in  the  liquid  form, 
and  in  solidifying  crystallises  in  octahedra  with  curved  facets 
characteristic  of  natural  diamonds.  If,  on  the  other  hand, 
the  iron  is  allowed  to  cool  without  any  device  to  compress 
the  interior,  the  carbon  crystallises  out  in  the  form  of 
graphite  or  plumbago,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  termed,  "  black- 
lead."  This  variety  of  carbon  is  also  found  native ;  it 
forms  hexagonal  plates,  is  soft,  and  is  slippery  to  the  touch. 
Lastly,  many  compounds  of  carbon  when  heated  to  redness 
decompose,  and  leave  the  carbon  in  an  amorphous  or  non- 
crystalline  form.  Varieties  of  these  are  gas- carbon,  deposited 
in  the  necks  of  gas-retorts ;  oil- coke,  left  as  a  residue  after 
the  distillation  of  certain  oils ;  sugar-charcoal,  the  residue 
on  heating  sugar  in  absence  of  air  ;  and  wood-charcoal,  the 
product  of  the  distillation  of  wood.  All  of  these  are  black, 
more  or  less  hard  substances.  When  heated  to  whiteness 
in  an  electric  arc,  they  are  transformed  into  graphite.  They 
all  contain  a  trace  of  hydrogen,  from  which  they  can  be 
freed  by  heating  to  redness  in  a  current  of  chlorine.  At 
the  temperature  of  the  electric  arc,  carbon  volatilises  with- 
out fusion  and  condenses  as  graphite ;  it  is  only  when  it 
is  heated  under  pressure,  as  described,  that  it  can  be  made 
to  melt. 

Silicon. — This  element  exists  in  three  forms,  two  of 
them  crystalline,  the  third  amorphous.  The  amorphous 
modification  when  dissolved  in  molten  zinc  or  aluminium 
crystallises  out  in  either  black  lustrous  tablets  resembling 
graphite  or  in  iron-grey  prisms.  It  is  not  known  what 
circumstances  determine  the  formation  of  the  one  or  the 


76  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

other  form.  Silicon  melts  at  a  bright  red  heat,  and  can 
be  cast  into  rods ;  they  have  the  graphite-like  crystalline 
form. 

Tin. — This  metal,  when  kept  at  a  low  temperature — 
about  —30° — changes  to  a  grey  powder.  On  heating  the 
powdery  modification  to  above  20°,  it  is  converted  back 
into  ordinary  metallic  tin,  the  more  quickly  the  higher  the 
temperature.  If  the  powder  be  left  in  contact  with  ordinary 
tin  at  atmospheric  temperature,  the  metal  is  slowly  changed 
into  its  allotropic  modification,  and  articles  of  tin  fall  to 
pieces. 

Phosphorus. — Three  forms  are  known  for  phosphorus. 
The  first,  or  ordinary  form,  is  a  waxy  solid,  melting  at 
44.4°.  It  is  soluble  in  carbon  disulphide,  and  crystallises 
from  it  in  rhombic  prisms.  It  is  luminous  in  the  dark 
in  presence  of  air,  but  if  the  pressure  of  the  air  be  raised 
it  ceases  to  shine ;  it  is  also  non-luminous  in  oxygen.  It 
is  very  easily  inflamed,  and  burns  to  its  oxide,  P2^s*  ^  ls 
poisonous  when  swallowed.  The  liquid  obtained  by  melting 
it  is  nearly  colourless.  When  this  variety  is  heated  to  240° 
in  a  vessel  from  which  oxygen  is  excluded,  it  changes  to 
a  red  substance,  generally  termed  amorphous  phosphorus. 
This  body  is  insoluble  in  carbon  disulphide  and  the  other 
solvents  which  dissolve  ordinary  phosphorus.  It  is  not  lumi- 
nous in  the  dark,  and  is  not  easily  oxidisable.  When  heated 
to  a  temperature  higher  than  240°,  it  volatilises  and  condenses 
to  ordinary  phosphorus,  and  if  air  be  present  it  takes  fire. 
It  is  soluble  in  lead,  and  when  the  molten  lead  cools  it 
crystallises  out  in  nearly  black  crystals.  Indeed,  its  colour 
depends  on  the  temperature  at  which  it  is  formed.  If 
produced  at  260°,  it  is  deep  red,  and  has  a  glassy  fracture  ; 
at  440°  it  has  a  granular  fracture  and  is  orange;  at  550° 
it  is  grey,  and  it  fuses  at  580°,  and  on  solidifying  it 
forms  red  crystals.  It  is  possible,  though  not  probable, 
that  a  mixture  of  several  allotropic  forms  is  the  cause  of  all 
these  changes. 

Arsenic. — When  arsenic   is  distilled,  it  passes  directly 


ALLOTROPY  OF   OXYGEN  77 

from  the  gaseous  to  the  solid  state  on  condensing.  The  por- 
tion which  cools  most  quickly  is  a  black  powder ;  that 
which  condenses  in  the  warm  part  of  the  tube  has  a  grey 
metallic  lustre.  The  black  variety  can  be  converted  into 
the  crystalline  metallic  variety  on  heating  to  360°.  When 
arsenic  is  heated  in  an  indifferent  atmosphere  under  great 
pressure,  its  boiling-point  is  raised  above  its  melting-point, 
and  it  melts ;  on  solidification,  it  forms  the  metallic  variety. 

Antimony. — The  usual  form  of  antimony  is  a  white 
brittle  metal  with  a  faint  bluish  tinge.  If  deposited  from 
a  strong  solution  of  its  chloride  by  electrolysis,  a  grey 
powdery  deposit  is  formed,  which  has  the  curious  property 
of  exploding  when  heated  or  struck  ;  it  then  changes  into 
the  metallic  variety.  It  has  a  lower  density  than  the 
ordinary  antimony.^ 

Oxygen. — The  allotropic  variety  of  oxygen  is  named 
ozone  ;  it  was  discovered  by  Schoenbein,  and  is  obtained  by 
causing  a  shower  of  minute  electric  sparks  (the  "  silent 
electric  discharge")  to  pass  through  oxygen,  preferably 
cooled  to  a  low  temperature.  One  of  the  best  forms  of 
"  ozoniser "  is  a  tube  about  I  cm.  in  diameter,  partially 
evacuated,  and  traversed  by  a  wire  from  end  to  end ;  this 
tube  is  contained  in  a  wider  one,  and  the  space  between  the 
two  tubes  contains  a  set  of  metallic  annuli,  connected 
together  by  a  wire.  Oxygen  is  passed  slowly  through  the 
space  between  the  two  tubes,  while  the  two  wires  are 
connected  with  the  secondary  terminals  of  a  coil ;  sparks 
pass  through  the  inner  glass  and  the  space  between  the  two 
tubes.  On  first  passing  the  current  the  oxygen  expands,  but 
almost  at  once  contraction  ensues,  and  ozone  issues  at  the 
further  end  of  the  tube.  It  is  not  possible,  in  dealing  with 
ozone,  to  use  indiarubber  connections  of  any  sort,  for  the 
rubber  is  at  once  attacked.  Ozone  is  also  formed  when 
phosphorus  slowly  oxidises  in  moist  air  ;  when  the  vapour  of 
ether  or  benzene  is  stirred  with  a  hot  glass  rod  in  presence  of 
air  ;  when  sulphuric  acid  acts  on  barium  dioxide  or  potas- 
sium permanganate,  or  when  sulphuric  acid  is  electrolysed. 


78  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

It  is  also  produced  in  large  amount  when  fluorine  comes  into 
contact  with  water. 

Its  name  refers  to  its  most  striking  property — its  strong 
disagreeable  smell.  It  condenses  when  cooled  by  liquid  air 
to  a  dark  blue  liquid,  which  is  very  explosive  ;  and  its  gas, 
when  seen  in  a  long  tube,  has  also  a  blue  colour  ;  it  shows 
characteristic  spectral  bands.  The  blue  liquid  boils  at 
—  1 06°,  whereas  the  boiling-point  of  oxygen  is-i82°.  Liquid 
oxygen  is  also  blue,  but  has  quite  a  pale  tint.  When  heated 
to  250°,  ozone  is  re-convened  into  ordinary  oxygen;  but 
oxygen  cannot  be  transformed  into  ozone  by  heat  alone. 
Ozone  is  a  much  more  active  body  than  oxygen  ;  it  liber- 
ates iodine  from  potassium  iodide  (aKI.Aq  +  O3  + H2O  = 
2KOH.  Aq  +  L,  4-  O9)  ;  it  oxidises  metallic  silver  and 
mercury  (Hg  +  O3  =  HgO  +  O0) ;  and  it  changes  lead  sul- 
phide into  sulphate  (PbS  +  4O8=*PbSO4+4O2).  When 
passed  through  a  solution  of  hydrogen  dioxide,  oxygen 
is  evolved  (HL,O2.Aq  +  O3  =  H2O.Aq+  2O2)  ;  and  it 
bleaches  indigo  and  other  colouring  matters. 

Its  density  is  24,  that  of  oxygen  being  16  ;  whence  its 
formula  is  O3.  Its  rate  of  diffusion  into  air  bears  to  that 
of  chlorine,  of  which  the  density  is  35.47,  the  ratio  of 
/24  •  /35«5 — another  proof  of  its  density.  When  oxygen 
is  converted  into  ozone,  the  portion  which  is  changed  con- 
tracts in  the  proportion  3:2;  and  conversely,  when  ozone 
is  heated  and  converted  into  ozone,  that  portion  of  the  gas 
which  consists  of  ozone  increases  in  volume  from  2  :  3. 
All  these  proofs  demonstrate  that  the  formula  of  ozone 


isOy 


Ozone  is  a  poison  ;  it  excites  coughing,  and  in  large 
quantity  asphyxiates,  the  blood  becoming  venous.  It  is 
very  doubtful  whether  ozone  has  been  found  in  the  atmos- 
phere, except,  perhaps,  after  a  thunderstorm. 

Sulphur. — The  allotropy  of  gaseous  sulphur  has  already 
been  alluded  to  ;  that  of  liquid  and  of  solid  sulphur  is  no  less 
striking.  When  sulphur  is  melted,  it  forms  a  mobile,  light 
brown  liquid.  On  raising  the  temperature,  the  liquid  be- 


ALLOTROPY   OF  SULPHUR  79 

comes  viscous,  so  much  so,  indeed,  that  the  vessel  contain- 
ing it  can  be  inverted  without  spilling  the  liquid  ;  and  at  a 
still  higher  temperature  it  again  becomes  mobile,  but  has 
a  deep  brown  colour.  On  cooling,  these  changes  are  re- 
versed. If  viscous  sulphur  be  poured  into  water,  it  hardens 
to  a  substance  resembling  indiarubber  ;  this  form,  if  kept  for 
some  hours,  falls  into  minute  octahedral  crystals.  When 
molten  sulphur  is  allowed  to  cool  slowly,  it  solidifies  at  120°, 
forming  long  monoclinic  needles  of  a  pale  brown  colour. 
This  variety  is  also  deposited  on  evaporating  a  solution  of 
sulphur  in  ether  or  in  benzene.  These  needles,  on  standing 
for  a  few  hours,  become  opaque  and  spontaneously  fall  into 
minute  rhombic  octahedra.  Octahedral  crystals  of  a  large 
size  may  be  produced  by  allowing  a  solution  of  sulphur  in 
carbon  disulphide  to  evaporate  spontaneously  ;  this  variety 
melts  at  115°;  its  colour  is  bright  yellow;  it  is  in  this 
form  that  sulphur  occurs  native.  Its  density  is  2.07, 
whereas  that  of  monoclinic  sulphur  is  1.97  at  o°.  Two 
other  varieties  of  sulphur  are  known.  If  sulphur  vapour  be 
quickly  cooled,  it  condenses  in  a  dusty  form,  termed 
"  flowers  of  sulphur  ;  "  this  powder,  if  treated  with  carbon 
disulphide,  leaves  an  insoluble  residue,  distinct  from  all  other 
forms,  which  are  all  soluble  in  disulphide.  And  lastly,  if 
sulphur  be  produced  in  presence  of  water  by  the  decompos- 
ing action  of  water  on  sulphur  chloride,  or  by  the  action  of 
hydrogen  dioxide  on  hydrogen  sulphide,  the  sulphur  does 
not  separate,  but  remains  in  a  state  of  "  pseudo-solution  "  in 
the  water  ;  it  can  be  precipitated  on  addition  of  salts  such 
as  calcium  chloride.  It  is  thus  evident  that  the  chemistry 
of  the  element  sulphur  is  very  complicated. 

Selenium. — This  element  has  three  allotropic  forms  ; 
when  precipitated  from  selenious  acid  by  sulphurous  acid — 
H2SeO3.  Aq  +  2H2SO3.Aq  =  Se  +  2H2SO4.  Aq  +  H2O— 
it  forms  a  red  powder,  soluble  in  carbon  disulphide,  and 
crystallising  therefrom  in  dark  red  crystals,  a  non-conductor 
of  electricity.  Either  the  amorphous  red  variety  or  these 
crystals,  if  kept  at  210°  for  some  time,  change  into  a  black 


8o  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

crystalline  variety,  insoluble  in  carbon  disulphide,  and  con- 
ducting electricity  on  exposure  to  light.  These  varieties 
also  differ  in  density  and  melting-point. 

Ruthenium,  Rhodium,  and  Indium  are  grey-white 
metals,  hard  and  fusible  only  at  a  very  high  temperature. 
They  are  insoluble  in  hydrochloric,  nitric,  or  sulphuric 
acid.  On  alloying  them  with  zinc  or  lead,  and  then  dis- 
solving out  the  alloyed  metal  with  acid,  the  ruthenium, 
rhodium,  or  iridium  is  left  as  a  black  powder,  exploding 
when  gently  warmed,  and  going  back  into  the  ordinary 
form  of  the  metal. 

Iron. — It  has  been  known  for  many  centuries  that  the 
properties  of  iron  are  profoundly  modified  when  it  contains 
a  small  percentage  of  carbon ;  it  is  then  termed  steel. 
Steel  has  a  fine  granular  fracture,  and  is  not  fibrous  like 
pure  wrought  iron,  or  coarsely  crystalline  like  cast-iron, 
which  contains  a  greater  proportion  of  carbon  than  steel, 
the  latter  containing  from  0.8  to  1.9  per  cent.  When  steel 
is  heated  and  then  suddenly  cooled, — an  operation  termed 
"  tempering," — it  becomes  very  hard;  this  is  due  to  a  change 
which  takes  place  in  the  molecular  structure  of  iron  at  850°. 
At  that  temperature  its  specific  heat  suffers  a  considerable 
change  ;  and  if  the  iron  contains  a  small  percentage  of 
carbon,  the  allotropic  state  persists  after  the  cooling  has 
taken  place,  if  produced  sufficiently  rapidly.  The  various 
qualities  of  steel,  elastic  as  in  springs,  hard  as  in  razors, 
brittle  and  extremely  hard  as  in  files,  are  due  to  admixture 
of  more  or  less  of  the  allotropic  modification  with  ordinary 
iron,  which  is  a  comparatively  soft  metal. 

Silver  and  Gold. — Several  metals,  among  them  silver, 
gold,  and  platinum,  when  precipitated  from  aqueous  solutions 
of  their  salts  by  some  reducing  agent,  such  as  sodium 
formate,  form  apparent  solutions  of  the  metal  in  water. 
That  of  platinum  is  grey,  of  silver  blue  or  red,  and  of  gold 
purple.  The  colour,  however,  depends  on  the  state  of 
division  of  the  metal,  and  it  may  vary  greatly  with  the 
same  metal.  If  the  "pseudo-solution"  of  platinum  is 


PHASES  81 

warmed,  the  metal  is  precipitated  as  a  black  powder,  known 
as  "  platinum-black."  This  substance  readily  absorbs 
gaseous  oxygen  or  hydrogen ;  when  heated,  it  is  converted 
into  a  grey  powder,  obviously  finely  divided  ordinary  plati- 
num, termed  "platinum  sponge."  On  evaporating  the 
pseudo-solutions  of  silver  or  gold,  the  metal  remains  as  a 
coloured  residue  ;  on  warming  or  rubbing,  it  changes  into 
the  ordinary  metal. 

These  are  the  known  cases  of  allotropy.  In  some  cases, 
as  when  the  gases  of  ozone  or  sulphur  are  weighed,  a  direct 
clue  to  the  molecular  weight,  and  therefore  the  cause  of 
isomerism,  is  revealed ;  but  in  others,  where  the  different 
modifications  are  liquid  or  solid,  there  is  no  obvious  means 
of  tracing  the  cause  of  the  allotropy.  Yet  in  some  instances 
a  reasonable  theory  can  be  formed. 

Phases. — We  know  that  a  liquid  and  its  gas  can  exist 
together  at  different  temperatures,  and  that  at  high  tem- 
peratures the  gas  exerts  a  greater  pressure  than  at  low. 
To  each  temperature  corresponds  a  definite  pressure.  If 
the  temperature  be  named,  it  is  termed  the  "boiling-point" 
at  that  pressure ;  if  the  pressure  for  any  particular  tem- 
perature be  alluded  to,  it  is  called  the  "  vapour-pressure." 
According  to  the  molecular  theory,  the  vapour-pressure  is 
reached  when  as  many  molecules  leave  the  liquid  surface  in 
unit  time  as  return  to  it  by  the  condensation  of  the  gas. 
There  is  a  state  of  equilibrium  ;  but  on  raising  the  tem- 
perature the  equilibrium  is  disturbed,  and  more  vapour  is 
given  off  to  restore  it.  The  gaseous  state  and  the  liquid 
state  are  termed  two  phases  of  the  same  kind  of  matter, 
and  they  can  coexist  at  various  temperatures. 

When  the  pressure  is  reduced  below  a  certain  amount 
— for  water  to  4.6  mms. — the  boiling-point  is  lowered  to 
o°.  At  this  temperature  water  usually  freezes  under  a 
pressure  of  one  atmosphere.  As  the  pressure  is  4.6  mms., 
the  freezing-point  of  the  water  will  be  at  0.007°  above 
zero ;  for  it  is  found  that  the  freezing-point  of  water  is 
lowered  by  that  amount  for  each  rise  of  one  atmosphere 

VOL.  i.  F 


82 


MODERN   CHEMISTRY 


pressure ;  and  if  the  atmosphere  pressure  be  removed,  the 
freezing-point  will  be  raised.  At  this  temperature,  there- 
fore, ice,  water,  and  water-vapour  are  all  in  equilibrium 
with  each  other  and  can  coexist.  The  point  is  called  the 
"  triple  point."  The  states  of  water,  ice,  and  steam  can 
be  represented  by  a  diagram. 


B 


PRESSURE 


t 


SOLID 


L  V 


VAPOUR 


A 


TEMPERATURE 


Let  pressures  be  measured  up  the  vertical  line  AB, 
and  temperatures  along  the  horizontal  line  AC.  The  point 
O  corresponds  to  the  temperature  0.007°  and  to  the  pres- 
sure 4.6  mms.  Along  the  line  OLV  (LV  standing  for 
liquid-vapour)  the  liquid  and  the  vapour  can  coexist  ;  it  is 
usually  termed  the  "  vapour-pressure  curve."  The  line  O 
SL  (solid-liquid)  shows  the  alteration  in  the  melting-point 
of  ice  as  the  pressure  rises  ;  its  slope  is  greatly  exaggerated 
in  order  to  make  it  visible.  It  shows  that  as  the  pressure  is 
raised  the  melting-point  of  ice  becomes  lower  and  lower. 
Lastly,  the  line  OSV  (solid- vapour)  indicates  the  coexist- 
ence of  the  solid  and  the  vapour  phases  ;  the  pressure  is 


PHASES   OF   WATER  83 

below  4.6  mms.,  and  the  temperature  below  o°.  The 
regions  shown  correspond  to  those  conditions  of  temperature 
and  pressure  where  the  substance  can  exist  as  solid,  as  liquid, 
or  as  gas.  The  dotted  line  WO  represents  the  condition  of" 
a  super-cooled  liquid.  It  is  possible  to  cool  water  below  o°  ; 
for  example,  if  it  be  pure  and  kept  at  rest,  its  vapour- 
pressure  is  then  greater  than  that  of  ice  at  the  same  tempera- 
ture. It  has  not  been  found  possible  to  heat  ice  above  its 
melting-point  without  its  melting,  but  it  is  possible  to  cool 
steam  somewhat  below  its  condensing  temperature  without 
condensation  occurring,  as  shown  by  the  dotted  line  OP. 
These  states  of  relative  instability  have  been  called  "  meta- 
stable."  Shaking  the  water  or  introducing  particles  of 
dust  into  the  steam  at  once  induce  freezing  or  condensation  ; 
the  water  changes  to  ice  or  the  steam  condenses. 

The  condition  of  allotropy  can  be  similarly  represented. 
JBut  the  problem  is  more  complicated ;  in  the  case  of 
sulphur,  for  example,  there  are  two  solid  phases,  the  rhombic 
and  the  monoclinic,  besides  more  than  one  liquid  phase.  As 
the  two  solid  phases,  the  rhombic  melting  at  115°,  and  the 
monoclinic  melting  at  120°,  are  well  known,  attention  will 
be  confined  to  them. 

If  sulphur  be  allowed  to  crystallise  from  fusion,  it  assumes 
the  monoclinic  form  of  long  prisms.  These  crystals,  however, 
change  spontaneously  at  the  ordinary  temperature,  and  in  a 
few  hours  fall  into  minute  rhombic  octahedra.  At  the 
temperature  95.6°,  however,  this  change  no  longer  takes 
place  ;  the  two  crystalline  forms  can  coexist  in  presence  of 
each  other  without  one  form  turning  into  the  other.  The 
rhombic  variety  gives  off  vapour  which  of  course  exerts 
pressure  at  that  temperature  and  at  lower  temperatures  at 
which  the  rhombic  variety  is  stable ;  and  the  vapour- 
pressure  curve  is  indicated  by  the  line  PRV  (rhombic- 
vapour).  This  temperature  is  termed  the  "transition 
temperature "  for  rhombic  and  monoclinic  sulphur  and 
sulphur-vapour.  It  may  be  compared  with  the  melting- 
point  of  ice  under  4.6  mms.  pressure,  which,  it  will  be 


84 


MODERN  CHEMISTRY 


remembered,  is  0.007°,  where  water,  ice,  and  steam  are  in 
equilibrium.  But  it  differs  inasmuch  as  it  is  possible  to 
heat  rhombic  sulphur  above  the  transition-point  P  without 
immediate  change.  PO  is  the  vapour-pressure  curve  for 
monoclinic  sulphur,  which  melts  at  120° ;  and  each  of  these 
curves  must  meet  in  the  transition-point  P,  for  at  that  tempe- 
rature both  modifications  can  coexist.  Below  95.6  the 
monoclinic  form  is  in  the  metastable  condition,  and  the  line 


JLR 


Pressure 


95-6 


//5°   <2O° 


Te  mpe  Tcutu.  re 

PMV,  which  is  a  continuation  of  the  line  OP,  expresses 
the  vapour-pressure  of  the  monoclinic  variety  below  the 
transition  temperature.  The  rhombic  variety  above  95.6° 
is  in  the  metastable  condition,  and  its  vapour-pressure  is 
shown  by  the  line  PRV,  the  upper  portion  of  which  is 
dotted.  If  the  sulphur  be  compressed,  the  transition-point 
rises,  and  the  line  PQ  typefies  this.  At  120°  there  must  be 
another  transition-point,  for  here  rhombic  sulphur,  liquid 
sulphur,  and  sulphur-vapour  may  exist  in  presence  of  each 


PHASES  OF  SULPHUR  85 

other.  Now  the  melting-point  of  sulphur  is  raised  by 
pressure  instead  of  being  lowered,  as  in  the  case  of  water. 
This  is  the  more  usual ;  the  lowering  of  melting-point  of  the 
solid  water  depends  on  the  fact  that  the  density  of  ice  is  less 
than  that  of  water,  but  that  of  solid  sulphur  is  greater  than 
that  of  molten  sulphur.  Hence  the  rise  of  the  transition- 
point  along  the  line  PQ.  At  O  three  curves  meet :  OP, 
representing  the  vapour-pressure  of  monoclinic  sulphur ;  O 
LV,  the  vapour-pressure  of  liquid  sulphur;  and  OQ,  the 
effect  of  pressure  in  raising  the  melting-point  of  rhombic 
sulphur.  The  lines  PQ  and  OQ  happen  to  meet  at  Q, 
which  is  also  a  transition-point ;  it  lies  at  131°  ;  and  here 
rhombic,  monoclinic,  and  liquid  sulphur  can  all  coexist, 
though  the  pressure  is  too  high  for  vapour  to  exist  along 
with  them.  At  higher  temperatures  and  pressures  mono- 
clinic  sulphur  is  incapable  of  existence.  As  we  have  seen, 
the  metastable  states  of  sulphur  are  capable  of  existence  for 
some  time.  Rhombic  sulphur  can  be  heated  to  its  melt- 
ing-point, 115°,  which  lies  above  its  transition  tempera- 
ture. At  this  temperature  it  and  the  liquid  resulting  from 
its  fusion  are  both  in  a  metastable  condition.  And  the 
effects  of  pressure  in  raising  the  melting-point  of  rhombic 
sulphur  is  shown  by  the  dotted  line  RVQ,  which  is 
continued  in  QLR  (liquid-rhombic)  at  temperatures  at 
which  the  monoclinic  variety  is  no  longer  capable  of  exist- 
ence. 

Although  the  allotropy  of  other  elements  has  not  been 
so  minutely  studied  as  that  of  sulphur,  it  is  certain  that  the 
various  conditions  can  all  be  represented  in  a  similar  manner. 
For  example,  the  transition-point  of  the  grey  and  metallic 
modifications  of  tin  is  20° ;  below  that  temperature  metallic 
tin  is  in  the  metastable  condition  ;  if  cooled  sufficiently,  it 
may  change  spontaneously  into  the  grey  powder,  but  the 
change  may  not  take  place,  just  as  water  may  be  kept 
super-cooled  without  freezing.  But  just  as  the  addition 
of  a  crystal  of  ice  to  super-cooled  water  causes  it  to 
crystallise,  so  the  contact  of  grey  tin  below  20°  with 


86  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

metallic  tin  induces  the  change  ;  the  surface  of  the  tin 
becomes  covered  with  spots  like  pimples,  and,  if  time  be 
given,  all  the  tin  falls  to  powder.  The  change  is  the  more 
rapid,  up  to  a  certain  point,  the  lower  the  temperature.  If 
the  grey  tin  be  raised  in  temperature  above  20°,  it  is  recon- 
verted into  metallic  tin,  the  more  quickly  the  higher  the 
temperature. 

The  yellow  waxy  condition  of  ordinary  phosphorus,  too, 
appears  to  be  a  metastable  condition,  for  if  its  temperature 
is  raised  under  pressure,  red  phosphorus  is  produced.  On 
the  other  hand,  if  red  phosphorus  be  heated  under  ordinary 
pressure,  it  volatilises  and  condenses  as  yellow  phosphorus. 
Nevertheless,  at  the  very  highest  temperatures,  the  vapour- 
pressure  curves  would  indicate  that  yellow  phosphorus  is 
the  stable  form. 

We  are  still  in  the  dark  as  to  the  precise  reason  of  such 
allotropic  changes.  From  cases  which  can  be  investigated, 
owing  to  the  liquid  or  gaseous  states  of  the  allotropic  modi- 
fications, the  cause  would  appear  to  consist  in  a  greater  or 
less  molecular  complexity,  but  this  is  not  proved  for  solids. 
It  is  possible  that  the  cause  of  allotropy  is  to  be  found,  in 
some  cases  at  least,  in  a  different  arrangement  of  the  mole- 
cules in  the  solid,  and  this  suggestion  falls  in  with  the  fact 
that  allotropy  often  consists  in  different  crystalline  forms, 
but  it  is  also  conceivable  that  a  different  crystalline  form 
may  correspond  with  difference  in  molecular  complexity 
as  well  as  with  different  molecular  arrangement.  Until 
some  method  is  discovered  whereby  the  molecular  weights 
of  solids  can  be  determined,  it  is  not  probable  that  certainty 
will  be  attained. 


CHAPTER   VI 

Isomerism — Polymerism — Optical  and  Crystal- 
lographic  Isomerism — Stereo-  Isomerism — 
Tautom  erism . 

CLOSELY  connected  with  allotropy  is  what  is  termed 
isomerism.  Attention  was  first  called  to  the  existence  of 
compounds  with  identical  composition,  so  far  as  it  could 
be  ascertained  by  analysis,  but  possessing  different  physical 
properties,  such  as  melting-point,  boiling-point,  and  crys- 
talline form,  and  different  chemical  properties,  by  Wohler 
and  by  Liebig.  Faraday,  too,  drew  attention  to  a  similar 
phenomenon  which  has  received  the  name  of  polymerism. 
All  food  contains  the  elements  carbon,  hydrogen, 
oxygen,  and  nitrogen,  besides  sulphur,  phosphorus,  and 
other  elements.  The  main  constituents  of  food  are  starch, 
which  is  the  chief  component  of  bread,  and  which  is 
devoid  of  nitrogen ;  and  albumen  and  allied  bodies,  of 
which  flesh  mainly  consists,  which  is  rich  in  nitro- 
gen;  dried  meat,  indeed,  contains  from  10  to  12 
per  cent,  of  that  element.  During  the  passage  of  food 
.through  the  system,  the  carbon  and  hydrogen  are  mainly 
eliminated  by  the  lungs  as  carbon  dioxide,  CO2,  and  water, 
H2O  ;  while  the  largest  portion  of  the  nitrogen  passes 
away  through  the  kidneys,  in  the  form  of  a  compound 
named  urea,  of  the  formula  CON2H4.  Now  Wohler 
succeeded  in  1827  in  forming  urea  artificially  by  preparing 
a  compound  of  ammonia,  NH3,  with  an  acid  termed  cyanic 
acid,  HNCO,  itself  producible  from  the  elements  uhich 
87 


88  MODERN  CHEMISTRY 

it  contains.  On  heating  this  compound,  ammonium  cyanate, 
NH4NCO,  to  the  temperature  of  boiling  water,  it  under- 
goes an  "  isomeric  change/'  Before  such  heating,  if  the 
ammonium  cyanate  be  warmed  with  a  solution  of  caustic 
potash,  the  smell  of  ammonia  is  at  once  apparent ;  this  is 
the  usual  test  for  ammonium  ions  ;  but  after  the  change 
into  urea  has  taken  place,  ammonia  is  not  revealed  by  this 
test.  Moreover,  the  compound  formed,  urea,  forms  salts 
with  acids  ;  it  unites  with  hydrogen  chloride,  for  example, 
forming  CON2H4.HC1.  The  compound  from  which  it 
is  derived,  ammonium  cyanate,  on  treatment  with  hydro- 
chloric acid,  is  converted  into  ammonium  chloride,  NH4C1, 
and  cyanic  acid,  which  itself  undergoes  further  change, 
unnecessary  to  allude  to  here : — 

NH4NCO  +  HC1.  Aq  =  NH4C1.  Aq  +  HNCO. 

It  is  evident  that  here  there  are  two  compounds  containing 
the  same  elements  in  the  same  proportion  by  weight,  and 
yet  having  very  different  properties. 

Faraday,  in  experimenting  with  oil-gas,  produced  by 
heating  the  vapour  evolved  from  oil  at  a  high  temperature, 
attempted  to  condense  it  to  a  liquid  by  application  of  cold 
and  pressure.  In  this  he  was  successful,  and  the  compound 
he  obtained  was  identical  in  composition  with  the  well- 
known  defiant  gas,  now  termed  ethylene,  C2H4,  which  is 
the  product  on  heating  a  mixture  of  alcohol  with  concen- 
trated sulphuric  acid.  But  Faraday's  product  possessed  a 
density  twice  as  great  as  that  of  ethylene.  While  ethylene 
has  a  density  approximately  14  times  that  of  hydrogen,  imply- 
ing the  molecular  weight  28  (and  C2  =  24  +  H4  =  4  are  to- 
gether equal  to  28),  Faraday's  gas,  which  is  now  known 
as  butylene,  was  found  to  have  the  density  28,  implying  a 
molecular  weight  of  56,  and  involving  the  formula  C4Hg. 
Hence  it  appeared  that  two  compounds  could  exist,  of 
which  one  might  possess  a  molecular  weight  twice  as  great 
as  the  other,  yet  of  the  same  percentage  composition  ;  and 
to  this  the  name  polymerism  was  applied  ;  the  substance 


ISOMERISM  AND   POLYMERISM  89 

of  higher  molecular  weight  is  termed  the  polymer  of  that 
of  the  simpler  molecule. 

It  is  chiefly  among  compounds  of  carbon  that  the  pheno- 
mena of  isomerism  and  polymerism  have  been  observed  ; 
although  there  are  some  well-marked  cases  of  the  latter 
among  compounds  of  other  elements  ;  the  best  known  is 
that  of  NO2  and  N0O4  ;  the  former,  which  exists  only  at 
a  high  temperature,  is  a  dark  red  gas ;  the  latter  is  almost 
colourless,  and  is  produced  by  cooling  the  former.  But  in 
this  case  the  two  compounds,  to  both  of  which  the  name 
nitric  peroxide  is  applied,  are  very  easily  transformed  from 
one  state  into  the  other,  and  do  not  differ  in  their  chemical 
reactions.  Instances  of  isomerism  among  compounds  of 
elements  other  than  carbon  are  rare,  but  are  not  unknown. 

The  explanation  of  this  curious  phenomenon  was  sought 
for  in  the  arrangement  of  the  atoms  in  the  molecule.  The 
cases  given,  although  they  were  the  first  noticed,  are  not 
the  simplest ;  an  instance  will  therefore  be  chosen  from 
compounds  containing  only  the  two  elements  carbon  and 
hydrogen. 

One  of  the  constituents  of  coal-gas  is  named  methane, 
or  marsh-gas ;  it  escapes  from  the  mud  at  the  bottom  of 
stagnant  pools  when  it  is  stirred  with  a  stick  ;  its  formula 
is  CH4.  This  gas,  when  mixed  with  its  own  volume  of 
chlorine,  and  exposed  to  diffuse  light  for  some  hours,  ex- 
changes one  of  the  atoms  of  hydrogen  which  it  contains  for 
an  atom  of  chlorine  ;  at  the  same  time  the  displaced  hydro- 
gen unites  with  another  atom  of  chlorine,  forming  hydrogen 
chloride,  thus:  CH ,  +  C12  =  CHSC1  +  HCL  If  it  be 
assumed  that  the  hydrogen  in  marsh-gas  is  in  union  with 
the  carbon,  and  that  that  union  can  be  pictured  by  a  stroke 
or  "bond"  between  the  atoms,  the  formula  of  methane  can 
H 


H— C— H, 


be  written  H — C — H,  and  the  above  equation — 


90  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

H  H 

|  Cl  |  H 

H— C— H  +  |    _   H— C— C1+  I  , 
|  Cl  Cl 

H  H 

on  the  similar  assumption  that  a  molecule  of  chlorine 
consists  of  two  atoms,  of  which  one  replaces  hydrogen  in 
methane,  while  the  other  unites  with  that  displaced  hydrogen 
to  form  H— Cl. 

Now  only  one  compound  of  the  formula  CH3C1  is  known  ; 
hence  it  may  be  argued  that  the  hydrogen  atoms  and  the 
chlorine  atoms  are  symmetrically  grouped  round  the  carbon 
atom  in  chloromethane — for  so  the  compound  is  termed. 

The  element  sodium  readily  reacts  with  chlorine  ;  indeed, 
if  hot  sodium  be  plunged  into  a  jar  of  chlorine  gas,  the 
metal  burns  brightly,  and  a  white  compound  of  the  two 
is  produced,  which  is  none  other  than  common  salt,  or 
sodium  chloride,  NaCl.  It  is  possible  to  withdraw  the 
chlorine  from  chloromethane  by  bringing  the  gas,  dissolved 
in  ether  (on  which  neither  it  nor  sodium  have  any  action) 
in  contact  with  chips  of  sodium.  Another  gas  is  produced, 
of  which  the  analysis  and  vapour-density  show  it  to  possess 
the  formula  C9H6 ;  and  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  it 
has  been  produced  by  the  union  of  the  two  groups,  CH3, 
left  after  the  renewal  of  the  atom  of  chlorine  from  CH3C1 ; 
this  change  can  be  thus  expressed : 

H  H 

I        : - -:         | 

H— C— ;  Cl  +  Na  i  +  i  Na  +  Cl ;— C— H  - 


H  H 

H    H 

2Na— Cl  +  H— C— C— H. 

I       I 
H    H 


ISOMERISM   AND   POLYMERISM  91 

The  new  gas  is  called  ethane.  It,  too,  exists  in  only 
one  modification,  and  it  is  legitimate  to  suppose  that  the 
atoms  of  hydrogen  are  symmetrically  arranged  with  reference 
to  the  two  atoms  of  carbon. 

Like  methane,  it  can  be  attacked  by  chlorine  with  simi- 
lar results  ;  the  equation  is  :  C2H6  +  C12  =  C2H5C1  +  HC1. 
And  here  again  only  one  chlorethane,  C2H5C1,  is  known  ; 
another  argument  in  favour  of  symmetry. 

If  a  mixture  of  chloromethane  and  chlorethane,  dissolved 
in  ether,  be  treated  with  sodium,  a  third  "  hydrocarbon  " 
is  formed,  possessing  the  formula  C3Hg ;  it  is  named 
propane.  Its  formation  may  be  expressed  thus  : 

H  H    H 


-U-H  . 


— C— I  Cl  +  Na  j  +  I  Na  +  Cl  I 


H  H    H 

H    H    H 


2Na- 


L_C1  +  H— C— C— C— H. 

Ui 


Again,  only  one  propane  is  known.  But  if  it  is  exposed 
to  the  action  of  chlorine,  two  monochloropropanes  are  formed, 
each  of  which  has  the  empirical  formula  C3H7C1.  The 
chlorine  atom  in  each  isomer  may  be  replaced  by  the 
hydroxyl  group,  —OH  ;  the  resulting  products,  C3H7OH, 
are  termed  propyl  and  isopropyl  alcohols.  It  is  possible 
to  reconvert  each  of  these  compounds  into  its  respective 
chloropropane  ;  and  it  is  also  possible  to  obtain  from  them, 
by  oxidation,  very  different  products,  Propyl  alcohol, 
when  oxidised  by  boiling  with  a  solution  of  chromic  acid, 
a  compound  which  easily  loses  oxygen,  is  converted  first 
into  propionic  aldehyde,  C3H6O  ;  but  on  continued  oxi- 
dation the  aldehyde  is  changed  to  propionic  acid,  C3H6O2. 
On  the  other  hand,  isopropyl  alcohol  is  oxidised  by  similar 


MODERN   CHEMISTRY 


treatment  to  a  compound  called  acetone,  possessing  the  same 
empirical  formula  as  propionic  aldehyde,  viz.,  C3H6O,  but 
differing  entirely  from  the  latter  in  properties  ;  and  if  the 
process  of  oxidation  be  continued,  the  acetone  is  broken  up 
into  acetic  acid  and  carbon  dioxide,  both  simpler  com- 
pounds, containing  fewer  atoms  of  carbon  than  acetone. 
These  changes  are  easily  represented  by  the  following 
formulae,  which  are  termed  graphic,  or  structural,  or  consti- 
tutional, inasmuch  as  they  represent  to  some  extent  the  struc- 
ture of  each  molecule. 


H   H    H 
H—  C—  C—  C—  H 


Propane. 
H    Cl    H 

—  C—  C—  C—  H 


H 


Isochloropropane. 
H    H    H 

H—  C—  C—  C=0 

n 

Propionic  Aldehyde. 
H  OH  H 

H—  C—  C—  C—  H 


H    H    H 
Isopropyl  Alcohol. 


H    H    H 
H— C— C— C— Cl 

Hi 

Chloropropane. 
H    H    H 

H— C— C— C— O— H 

iii 

Propyl  Alcohol. 
H    H    O— H 

H— C— C— C=0 


H    H 
Propionic  Acid. 

H    O     H 
H—  C—  C—  C—  H 


Acetone. 


ISOMERISM  AND   POLYMERISM  93 

Tt  is  evident  that  while  propane  itself  is  a  symmetrical 
substance,  inasmuch  as  all  the  atoms  of  hydrogen  are 
symmetrically  arranged  as  regards  the  three  atoms  of  carbon, 
as  soon  as  an  atom  of  hydrogen  is  replaced  by  an  atom  of 
chlorine,  two  possibilities  are  open  ;  the  atom  of  chlorine 
may  attach  itself  either  to  one  of  the  end  atoms  of  carbon, 
or  to  the  middle  one.  In  each  case  a  different  compound 
is  produced  ;  and  this  is  shown  not  only  by  the  different 
boiling-points  of  the  two  chloro-compounds,  but  also  by 
their  behaviour  with  reagents. 

The  relation  of  propane  to  ethane  may  be  conceived  to 
be  due  to  the  replacement  of  an  atom  of  hydrogen  in  the 
latter  by  the  group  —  CH3,  which  is  termed  the  methyl 
group.  Ethane  may  be  viewed  as  methyl -methane, 
H3C — CH3,  and  propane  may  also  be  regarded  as  di- 
methyl-methane, H3C — CH9 — CH3,  the  central  group 
— CH2 — being  taken  as  the  methane  molecule,  of  which 
two  atoms  of  hydrogen  have  been  replaced  by  two  methyl 
groups.  If  the  structural  formula  of  propane  be  again 
inspected,  it  is  evident  that  two  butanes  must  be  possible — 
one,  a  methyl-propane ;  the  other,  a  trimethyl- methane, 
thus : — 

H 

H        H         H        H  TT  X  TT 

I   I    I    I  -<r 

H— C— C— C— C— H 


H 


H 


H—  C—  C—  C—  H 


Methyl-  Propane.  Trimethyl-  Methane. 

These  two  butanes  may  yield  similar  derivatives.  It  is 
evident  on  inspection  that  the  first  will  furnish  two  mono- 
chlorobutanes,  according  as  an  atom  of  chlorine  replaces 
one  of  hydrogen  of  either  of  the  two  end  atoms  of  carbon  ; 


94  MODERN  CHEMISTRY 

the  other,  if  the  chlorine  atom  is  attached  to  either  of  the 
middle  atoms  of  carbon.  And  the  second  butane  can  also 
yield  two  chlorobutanes,  according  as  a  chlorine  atom  re- 
places hydrogen  of  one  of  the  three  —  CH3  groups,  or 
hydrogen  of  the  ^CH  group. 

Such  forms  of  isomerism  are  very  common,  and  instances 
might  be  multiplied  indefinitely. 

Another  form  of  isomerism  arises  when  an  element  such 
as  nitrogen,  which  has  more  than  one  valency,  is  contained 
in  the  molecule.  The  atom  of  nitrogen  can  be  made  to 
occupy  one  of  two  positions  as  regards  an  atom  of  carbon. 
A  common  instance  of  this  is  the  isomerism  of  the  nitriles 
and  the  carbamines.  A  nitrile  is  a  compound  in  which  an 
atom  of  nitrogen  replaces  three  atoms  of  hydrogen,  all  of 
which  were  attached  to  the  same  atom  of  carbon.  Thus, 
from  ethane,  C2H6,  acetonitrile  is  derived  thus : — 

H    H  H 

H— C— C— H  H— C— C=N 

HH 

Ethane.  Acetonitrile. 

H-L<° 

\O— H 
H 
Acetic  Acid. 

It  is  seen  to  be  closely  allied  to  acetic  acid,  in  which 
three  of  the  atoms  of  hydrogen  of  ethane  are  also  replaced  ; 
but  this  time  two  by  an  atom  of  oxygen,  and  the  third  by 
the  hydroxyl- group,  —OH.  This  close  connection  is  made 
obvious  by  boiling  the  acetonitrile  with  dilute  alkali ;  the 
nitrogen  is  evolved  as  ammonia,  while  oxygen  and  hydroxyl 
take  the  place  of  the  atom  of  nitrogen  : — 


ISOMEKISM  AND   POLYMERISM  95 

II  II 

H\Q  I  *0  XH 

H— C— C=N  +  H/U  =H— C— Cf  +N^-H 

H— O— H  X)H  XH 

H  H 

But  an  isomer  of  acetonitrile  is  also  known,  to  which 
the  formula  CH3N==C  is  ascribed ;  for,  on  causing  it 
to  react  with  water,  the  products  are  methylamine, 

CH,— NH9,  and  formic  acid,  HC^  thus  :— 

\OH, 

H  H                                     H 

I  I                                       I         /H                .0 

H— C— X=  +O  +  H— O— H  =   H— C— N<      +H— Cf 

|  |         XH                XOH 

II  H                                     H 

From  this  it  is  inferred  that  in  the  latter  case  the  atom 
of  nitrogen  is  in  direct  union  with  the  atom  of  carbon  of  the 
CH3  group  ;  it  remains  united  even  after  attack  by  water 
in  presence  of  acid,  the  latter  accelerating  the  action. 

From  these  instances  it  is  evident  that  the  position  of  the 
elements  or  groups  in  a  molecule,  as  well  as  the  composition 
of  the  molecule,  determine  its  nature  ;  and  this  fact  is  even 
more  strikingly  shown  by  isomerism  in  the  group  of  com- 
pounds related  to  benzene,  a  liquid  hydrocarbon  of  the 
formula  CGH6. 

It  is  found  that  when  this  compound  is  attacked  by  chlorine, 
so  that  an  atom  of  hydrogen  is  replaced  by  an  atom  of  chlorine, 
the  resulting  oily  liquid,  named  chlorobenzene,  having  the 
formula  C6H5C1,  exists  in  only  one  modification.  But  if  two 
atoms  of  hydrogen  are  replaced  by  two  atoms  of  chlorine, 
there  are  three  compounds  produced,  to  each  of  which  the 
empirical  formula  C6H4C12  may  be  ascribed.  To  what  is 
this  isomerism  due  ? 

The  generally  accepted  graphic  or  structural  formula  for 
benzene,  first  suggested  by  Kekul£,  lately  professor  of 
chemistry  at  Bonn,  is — 


96  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

H   H 
C=C 

/I      2\ 

HC6  3CH, 

\5    4^ 
C— C 
H   H 

in  which  the  six  atoms  of  carbon  are  arranged  as  a  ring, 
and  each  in  combination  with  one  atom  of  hydrogen.  Bear- 
ing in  mind  that  a  symmetrical  replacement  cannot  produce 
isomerism,  it  is  obvious  that  it  is  a  matter  of  indifference 
whether  an  atom  of  chlorine  replaces  one  of  hydrogen  at- 
tached to  any  of  the  six  atoms  of  carbon,  numbered  I  to  6. 
But  when  two  atoms  of  hydrogen  are  replaced  by  two  atoms 
of  chlorine,  the  case  is  different.  The  substituting  atoms  of 
chlorine  may  have  three  distinct  positions  relatively  to  each 
other  ;  they  may  replace  hydrogen  atoms  combined  with  the 
carbon  atoms  I  and  2,  or  with  I  and  3,  or,  lastly,  with 
i  and  4.  Obviously  the  numbering  I  and  2  expresses  only 
any  two  contiguous  atoms  ;  it  is  identical  with  2  and  3,  3 
and  4,  &c.  So,  too,  I  and  3  is  identical  with  2  and  4,  3 
and  5,  &c.;  and  I  and  4  is  the  same  as  2  and  5  or  3  and  6. 
These  chlorine  derivatives  may  be  converted  into  numerous 
others  by  replacing  the  atoms  of  chlorine  by  other  atoms 
or  groups  of  atoms  ;  and  so  three  series  of  compounds  are 
obtainable,  all  of  which  belong  to  three  separate  groups. 
It  has  been  found  possible  to  determine  the  positions  relative 
to  each  other  of  the  entering  atoms  by  the  following  ingenious 
device.  Expressing,  for  shortness'  sake,  the  structural 
formula  above  given  by  a  simple  hexagon,  and  assuming 
that  carbon  atoms  are  situated  at  the  angles  of  the  hexagon, 
and,  where  not  otherwise  indicated,  in  combination  with 
hydrogen  ;  but  indicating  by  the  symbol  Cl  that  an  atom  of 
hydrogen  has  been  replaced  by  one  of  chlorine,  we  have  the 
following  three  formulae  for  the  three  dichlorobenzenes  : 


ISOMERISM   AND   POLYMERISM  97 

Cl     Cl  Cl  Cl 


Cl 
Ortho;  Meta;  Para; 


Now,  if  each  of  these  compounds  be  separately  treated  with 
chlorine,  trichlorobenzenes  are  formed  ;  these  are  shown  in 
the  lower  line  ;  and  it  will  be  noticed  that  while  the  first 
dichlorobenzene  (that  designated  by  the  prefix  "ortho-") 
can  yield  two,  and  only  two,  trichlorobenzenes,  the  "  meta-" 
dichlorobenzene  may  yield  three  trichlorobenzenes,  but  the 
"  para-"  dichlorobenzene  only  one  ;  or  in  numbers,  I  2  may 
yield  123  and  124  trichlorobenzenes  ;  I  3  may  yield 
I  2  3,  I  3  4,  and  135  trichlorobenzenes  ;  while  I  4  di- 
chlorobenzenes  can  yield  only  124  trichlorobenzenes  ;  the 
last  is  obviously  identical  with  I  3  4,  or  with  I  4  5,  or 
with  146  trichlorobenzene.  In  this  way  the  actual 
position  of  the  chlorine  atoms,  relatively  to  each  other,  in 
the  three  dichlorobenzenes,  was  established. 

All  these  formulae,  it  will  be  noticed,  are  written  on  the 
assumption  that  the  atoms  of  the  elements  lie  in  a  plane. 
Now  this  assumption  is  exceedingly  improbable.  It  is  true 
that  a  map  represents  only  the  length  and  breadth  of  a 
country ;  not  the  height  of  the  mountains,  unless  contour 
lines  be  made  use  of.  And  yet  a  map  renders  great  service, 
for  we  use  it,  allowing  for  this  important  omission.  So 
these  structural  formulas  may  be  advantageously  employed, 
so  long  as  we  remember  that  they  do  not  represent  all  the 
structure.  This  fact  must  have  been  in  the  minds  of  many 
chemists  for  more  than  ten  years  before  J.  A.  LeBel 
and  J.  H.  van't  Hoff  pointed  out  independently,  in  1874, 
the  necessity  of  employing  formulae  of  three  dimensions  in 

VOL.  i.  G 


98  MODERN  CHEMISTRY 

order  to  explain  certain  cases  of  isomerism  which  were 
inexplicable  on  the  assumption  that  the  elements  were  dis- 
tributed on  a  plane  surface,  as  in  the  instances  already  given. 
This  doctrine  of  the  arrangement  of  the  atoms  of  a 
molecule  in  space  of  three  dimensions  has  been  termed 
Stereo-chemistry. 

Stereo- chemistry. — The  deposit  found  in  wine-casks, 
named  tartar  or  argol,  is  the  potassium  salt  of  four  acids,  to 
which  the  generic  name  tartaric  has  been  given.  But  it 
has  long  been  known  that  although  all  these  acids  are  re- 
presented by  the  formula  C4H6O6,  they  differed  in  physical 
properties.  In  order  to  understand  the  nature  of  this  differ- 
ence, a  short  explanation  must  be  given  of  the  nature  of 
polarised  light. 

A  mineral  named  tourmaline  is  known,  which  is  some- 
times used  as  a  gem.  Its  colour  is  usually  green,  and  it 
occurs  in  fairly  large  transparent  crystals.  If  a  slice  of 
this  mineral  be  cut,  it  is  to  all  appearance  quite  transparent, 
allowing  light  to  pass  with  only  a  slight  diminution  in  its 
intensity,  as  would  be  the  case  if  the  light  were  to  pass 
through  a  plate  of  somewhat  dull  greenish  glass.  Through 
two  parallel  plates  of  tourmaline,  if  held  in  a  certain 
position,  light  still  passes  with  scarcely  diminished  intensity  ; 
but  if  the  one  plate  be  slid  round  on  its  neighbour,  so  that 
it  has  performed  a  partial  revolution  of  90°,  the  two  plates 
in  this  position  are  no  longer  transparent,  but  cut  off  light 
and  become  practically  opaque.  The  light,  after  passing 
through  the  first  plate,  is  said  to  be  polarised ;  and  it  is 
possible  to  extinguish  this  polarised  light  by  interposing 
a  second  plate  placed  in  a  certain  position. 

It  is  now  certain  that  the  phenomena  of  light  are  to  be 
attributed  to  the  propagation  of  waves  in  a  fluid  which 
penetrates  all  space,  even  the  interior  of  solids ;  a  fluid 
without  weight,  possibly  composed  of  particles,  which, 
however,  must  not  be  confused  with  the  atoms  or  mole- 
cules of  ponderable  bodies.  This  fluid  is  termed  ether. 
Now  waves  may  be  caused  in  ether  by  other  agencies  than 


STEREO-CHEMISTRY  99 

light.  When  an  ordinary  Leyden  jar  is  discharged,  the 
process  of  discharging  it  is  not  instantaneous  ;  the  spark 
which  passes  between  the  knob  of  the  electrical  u  tongs  " 
used  to  discharge  it  and  the  knob  of  the  jar  is  merely  one 
of  a  number  which  pass  to  and  fro  between  the  knob 
of  the  tongs  and  the  knob  of  the  jar  until  electrical 
equilibrium  is  established.  The  passage  of  such  sparks 
causes  waves  to  be  propagated  through  the  ether,  waves 
which  differ  from  those  of  light  only  in  their  much  greater 
length.  Such  waves,  whether  of  light  or  of  electric  dis- 
turbance, are  propagated  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of 
their  oscillation  ;  they  resemble  waves  en  the  sea  in  this 
respect,  but  differ  inasmuch  as  sea-waves  oscillate  merely 
up  and  down,  whereas  these  waves  of  light  or  electric 
disturbance  oscillate  in  all  possible  directions  at  right  angles 
to  that  in  which  they  move  forward.  The  name  applied 
to  such  electric  waves  is  "  Hertzian  waves,"  after  their 
discoverer,  the  late  Professor  Hertz  of  Bonn. 

It  has  been  found  that  the  leaves  of  a  book  held  with 
its  edge  towards  the  source  of  electric  waves  has  the 
effect  of  polarising  these  waves.  They  are  not  much 
diminished  in  intensity  by  their  passage  through  the  book, 
and  if  a  second  book  be  held  edgewise,  with  its  leaves 
parallel  to  those  of  the  first  book,  the  waves  can  still  pass 
on.  But  if  the  one  book  be  turned  round  so  that  its  leaves 
are  at  right  angles  to  those  of  the  other,  the  electric  waves 
are  blocked,  and  are  no  longer  able  to  pass.  The  Hertzian 
waves  are  so  long,  and  are  made  in  such  a  manner,  that 
it  is  possible  to  ascertain  in  which  plane  they  are  oscillat- 
ing ;  indeed,  the  experiment  with  the  book  proves  this. 
For  it  is  known  that  if  the  plane  of  the  waves  coincides  with 
that  of  the  pages  of  the  book,  the  waves  are  annihilated  ;  they 
cause  electrical  currents  in  each  leaf,  and  are  thus  absorbed. 
But  as  each  leaf  is  separated  from  its  neighbour  by  a  thin 
layer  of  air,  which  is  a  practical  insulator  of  electricity,  if 
the  leaves  of  the  book  are  turned  at  right  angles  to  the 
position  in  which  they  annihilate  the  electric  waves,  these 


100 


MODERN   CHEMISTRY 


waves  cannot  excite  currents  in  the  leaves,  because  each 
leaf  is  insulated  from  its  neighbour,  and  the  currents  have 
no  scope.  After  passage  through  the  book,  those  waves 
which  were  originally  oscillating  in  the  plane  of  these 
leaves  are  annihilated,  and  used  up  in  inciting  feeble  electric 
currents  in  each  leaf,  while  those  waves  originally  at  right 
angles  to  the  plane  of  the  book's  leaves  pass  through. 
Waves  oscillating  in  intermediate  planes,  e.g.  at  an  angle 
of  45°  to  the  plane  of  the  leaves,  are  partly  annihilated,  and 
partly  pass,  in  proportion  to  the  angle  which  they  make. 

The  coarsely  foliated  structure  of  a  book,  it  cannot  be 
doubted,  is  analogous  to  the  structure  of  a  plate  of  tourma- 
line. It  is  also  almost  certainly  foliated,  but  the  foliations 

FIG.  4. 


are  extremely  minute,  so  that  the  influence  they  have  in 
transmitting  or  obscuring  light  waves  is  commensurate  with 
the  difference  in  the  oscillation-length  of  light  waves  and 
Hertzian  waves.  The  light  which  passes  through  tourma- 
line, like  the  electric  waves  which  pass  through  the  leaves 
of  a  book  held  edgewise,  have  this  peculiarity — they  oscillate 
in  one  plane ',  and  resemble  in  that  respect  the  waves  of  the 
sea.  They  are  said  to  be  polarised. 

Now  it  has  been  found  that  certain  substances,  such  as 
crystals  of  quartz  or  of  chlorate  of  potassium,  have  the 
curious  property  of  rotating  the  plane  of  oscillation  of 
polarised  light ;  that  is,  light  polarised  by  passage  through 
a  plate  of  tourmaline  (or  by  other  means,  for  there  are 


STEREO-CHEMISTRY  101 

more  convenient  plans  of  polarising  light),. laftjct  then  trans- 
mitted through  a  plate  of  aybtallised  potassium  chlorate, 
is  not  wholly  obscured  when  it  impinges  on  a  second  plate 
of  tourmaline  held  at  right  angles  to  the  first ;  it  is  neces- 
sary to  turn  the  second  tourmaline  through  more  than  a 
right  angle  in  order  that  total  obscuration  shall  result.  The 
plane  of  polarisation  is  rotated  by  the  chlorate  crystal.  If, 
however,  the  crystal  is  dissolved  in  water,  its  solution  has 
no  such  property  ;  and  it  is  inferred  that  the  rotation  is  due, 
not  to  any  arrangement  of  the  atoms  in  the  molecule  of 
chlorate,  but  to  the  arrangement  of  the  molecules  in  the 
crystal.  For  if  the  rotation  were  due  to  the  former  cause, 
it  would  be  produced  by  solution  as  well  as  by  the  solid. 
It  is  believed,  therefore,  that  the  molecules  in  a  crystal  of 
chlorate  are  arranged  with  regard  to  each  other  like  the 
stones  in  a  spiral  staircase. 

The  case  is  otherwise  with  crystals  of  tartaric  acid. 
While  one  variety  of  tartaric  acid  crystal  rotates  the  plane 
of  polarisation  to  the  right,  in  the  direction  of  the  hands 
of  a  watch,  another  variety  has  the  opposite  effect,  and  a 
third  and  a  fourth  variety,  which  can  be  distinguished  by 
means  to  be  mentioned  hereafter,  are  without  action  on 
polarised  light.  Unlike  potassium  chlorate,  however,  solu- 
tions of  these  crystals  of  tartaric  acid  have  the  same  effect 
as  the  crystals  themselves ;  those  which  have  a  right- 
handed  rotatory  power  retain  that  power  even  when  dis- 
solved ;  the  left-handed  ones  remain  left-handed,  and  the 
neutral  ones  neutral. 

In  1 86 1,  Louis  Pasteur,  at  that  time  assistint  to 
Professor  Balard,  of  Paris,  made  a  most  important  dis- 
covery. It  was  that  crystals  of  dextro-rotatory  or  right- 
handed  tartaric  acid,  which  had  hitherto  been  believed  to 
be  regular,  were  all  characterised  by  small  facets,  developed 
only  on  one  corner.  The  neutral  tartaric  acid,  known  as 
racemic  acid,  had  no  such  facets  ;  but  on  crystallising  a 
certain  double  salt  of  racemic  acid  containing  ammonium 
and  sodium,  Pasteur  discovered  that  two  kinds  of  crystals 


102  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

were  depocited  ;  spine  wit'i  facets  on  'che  right  upper  corner 
(see  (tf)'Fig.  5),  and  some  with  facets  on  the  left  corner. 
The  facets  in  question  are  shaded  in  the  figure.  And  most 
singularly,  the  crystals,  after  they  had  been  picked  out  and 
separated  from  each  other,  when  dissolved  in  water  each 
rotated  the  plane  of  polarised  light,  the  crystals  with  right 
facets  to  the  right,  those  with  left  facets  to  the  left.  Up  to 
that  time  only  the  dextro-rotatory  tartaric  acid  had  been 
known.  From  this  Pasteur  drew  the  inference  that  the 
difference  between  the  two  varieties  must  be  due  to  the  dif- 
ferent arrangement  of  the  atoms  in  the  molecules  of  the  two 
varieties  of  tartaric  acid  in  space  of  three  dimensions. 


FIG.  5. 


(a) 


Pasteur  also  devised  two  other  methods  of  separating  the 
two  varieties  of  tartaric  acid  contained  in  racemic  acid  : 
one  was  by  preparing  a  salt  of  racemic  acid  with  a  base  such 
as  quinicine,  which  itself  possesses  optical  properties.  The 
salt  of  dextro-tartaric  acid  with  this  base  is  much  more 
soluble  than  that  of  the  left-handed  or  Isevo-rotatory  tartaric 
acid  ;  so  that  the  crystals  which  separate  out  on  evaporating 
the  solution  are  practically  pure  laevo-tartrate.  His  other 
method  of  effecting  the  separation,  or,  in  this  case,  the  de- 
struction of  the  dextro-tartrate,  was  by  allowing  a  solution  of 
racemate  of  ammonium  to  mould.  The  organism  consumes 
the  dextro-tartrate,  and  the  Isevo-tartrate  remains  after  the 
mould  has  been  suffered  to  grow  for  a  sufficient  time.  It 


STEREO-CHEMISTRY  103 

is  only  the  dextro-compound,  in  fact,  which  serves  as  food 
for  the  mould. 

In  1874,  LeBel  and  van't  HofF  independently  pro- 
pounded a  theory  to  explain  these  and  similar  cases  of 
isomerism  ;  it  is  based  on  the  conception  that  all  molecules 
occupy  space  of  three  dimensions,  and  that  the  isomerism  is 
caused  by  the  different  arrangement  of  the  atoms  in  the 
molecule.  This  arrangement  also  gives  a  clue  to  the  be- 
haviour of  such  isomers  in  rotating  the  plane  of  polarised 
light  to  the  left  or  to  the  right,  and  also  indicates  why 
crystals  composed  of  such  molecules  should  develop  "  hemi- 
hedral  "  facets,  as  those  represented  on  only  one  side  of  a 
crystal  are  termed. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  consider  any  particular  compound 
in  giving  a  sketch  of  this  theory  ;  it  may  be  stated  in  general 
terms. 

Marsh-gas,  or  methane,  it  has  already  been  remarked,  has 
the  formula  CH4.  We  have  already  seen  that  one  of  the 
four  atoms  of  hydrogen  which  it  contains  may  be  replaced 
by  an  atom  of  chlorine,  and  the  chlorine  by  the  group  CH3, 
or  methyl.  It  is  possible  to  replace  successively  all  four 
atoms  of  the  hydrogen  of  methane  by  atoms  or  groups ; 
these  may  be  all  different.  If  we  indicate  such  atoms 
or  groups  by  the  letters  P,  Q,  R,  S,  we  may  have 
the  compounds  CP3Q,  CP2Q2,  CP2QR,  and  CPQRS, 
as  well  as  CP4.  The  stereo-chemical  hypothesis  is  based 
on  the  conception  that  the  carbon  atom  is  situated  at 
the  central  point  of  a  pyramid  built  on  a  triangular  base 
(which  is  named  a  tetrahedron},  and  that  the  elements 
or  groups  in  combination  with  the  atom  of  carbon  are 
placed  at  the  four  corners  or  solid  angles  of  the  figure, 
The  formulae  of  the  compounds,  constructed  in  this 
manner,  would  present  the  appearance  in  perspective  shown 
in  Fig.  6. 

It  is  evident,  on  inspection,  that  no  isomerism  is  possible 
with  the  molecules  numbered  ( I ),  (2),  and  (3),  for  in  each 
case  a  mere  turning  of  the  tetrahedron  into  the  appropriate 


104 


MODERN   CHEMISTRY 


position  can  place  any  group  in  any  desired  position  relative 
to  the  others.  Thus  to  take  (3)  ;  if  it  be  supposed 
that  isomerism  could  result  from  the  relative  positions  of 
groups  R  and  Q  with  regard  to  the  two  groups  P,  it  is  only 
necessary  so  to  turn  the  crystal  that  the  position  of  the  two 
P  groups  is  reversed,  when  Q  will  lie  at  the  remote  corner, 
and  R  at  the  near  corner.  The  case  is  different  with 
the  configuration  in  (4).  If  Q  and  R  are  transposed, 
as  in  (5),  it  is  impossible  so  to  place  (4)  that  its 
groups,  P,  Q,  R,  and  S,  correspond  in  position  with 
those  in  (5).  In  fact,  (5)  may  be  termed  the  "  mirror- 


image"  of  (4),  for  a  reflection  of  (4)  in  a  mirror  is 
identical  with  (5).  To  choose  a  familiar  illustration,  it 
is  not  possible  to  convert  a  right  hand  into  a  left  hand 
except  by  reflecting  it  in  a  mirror.  In  this  sense,  the  right 
hand  is  a  stereoisomer  of  the  left  hand.  Now  it  is  precisely 
such  compounds,  and  only  such  compounds,  which  display 
isomerism  of  the  kind  described  ;  one  variety  of  which 
causes  the  plane  of  polarised  light  to  be  rotated  to  the  right, 
the  other  to  the  left.  One  of  the  most  familiar  instances 
of  such  isomerism  has  been  observed  with  the  acid  of  sour 
milk,  lactic  acid ;  in  it,  the  carbon  atom  at  the  centre  of 


STEREO-CHEMISTRY 


105 


the  tetrahedron  is  coupled  with  four  different  atoms  or 
groups,  and  is  termed  the  "  asymmetric  "  carbon  atom.  P 
may  stand  for  an  atom  of  hydrogen  ;  S  for  the  hydroxyl 
group,  -  OH  ;  Q  represents  the  methyl  group,  —  CH3  ; 


~ 

and  S  the  car  boxy  1  group,  -  C 


X)H, 


a  group  common  to 


all  the  acids  of  carbon,  and  already  shown  on  p.  94  as  part 
of  the  formula  of  acetic  acid.  The  ordinary  lactic  acid  of 
sour  milk  is  optically  inactive,  but  its  isomer  extracted 
from  flesh-juice  is  lasvo-rotatory.  By  one  of  Pasteur's 


methods,  however,  the  acid  from  milk  can  be  split  into  two 
varieties,  one  laevo-,  the  other  dextro-rotatory.  There  are, 
therefore,  two  forms  of  lactic  acid,  both  optically  active  ;  a 
mixture  of  the  two  in  equal  proportions  has  no  claim  to  be 
termed  a  third  body,  but  of  course  it  is  without  action  on 
polarised  light. 

It  is  possible  for  a  compound  to  contain  two  or  more 
asymmetric  carbon  atoms.  Such  is  the  case  with  the  tar- 
taric  acids.  The  structure  of  these  acids  is  shown  in  Fig.  7. 
It  is  supposed  to  be  represented  by  two  tetrahedra,  placed 
apex  to  apex,  one  of  course  being  inverted.  The  carbon 
atoms  in  the  interior  of  each  tetrahedron  are  united  by  one 
"  bond  "  or  valency.  The  other  three  valencies  of  each 


106  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

carbon  atom  are  employed  in  union  with  three  separate 
atoms  or  groups,  P,  Q,  and  R,  and  P',  Q',  and  R'.  In  the 
case  of  the  tartaric  acids,  these  are  respectively  an  atom  of 
hydrogen,  the  hydroxyl  or  -  OH  group,  and  the  carboxyl 

sP 

or  —  C/  group.      It   will  be  noticed  that  in  ( I )   of 

\OH 

Fig.  7,  if  we  look  down  on  the  surface  P  Q  R,  these 
letters  follow  each  other  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the 
hands  of  a  watch.  Let  us  suppose  that  polarised  light, 
entering  the  tetrahedron  from  above,  would  experience  rota- 
tion in  that  direction  ;  it  passes  from  the  base  of  the  inverted 
tetrahedron  to  the  summit.  Similarly,  light  entering  the 
lower  tetrahedron  from  below  will  be  rotated  in  the  same 
sense,  i.e.  in  the  direction  P'  Q'  R'  ;  but  if  it  fall  on  the 
lower  tetrahedron  from  above,  it  will  receive  a  right-handed 
screw,  the  same  in  direction  as  the  motion  of  the  hands  of  a 
watch.  Hence  the  lasvo-rotation  which  the  light  acquires 
by  its  passage  from  above  downwards  through  the  upper 
tetrahedron  is  reversed  and  changed  to  a  dextro-rotation 
by  its  passage  through  the  lower  tetrahedron,  seeing  that  it 
traverses  the  lower  one  from  apex  to  base.  The  one  com- 
pensates the  other,  and  the  molecule  is  inactive,  or  "  inter- 
nally compensated."  But  if  the  positions  of  Q'  and  R' 
in  the  lower  tetrahedron  be  interchanged,  as  in  (2),  then 
polarised  light,  entering  the  tetrahedron  from  below,  will 
have  a  right-handed  screw  imparted  to  it  ;  and  consequently, 
if  from  above,  a  left-handed  rotation,  opposite  to  that  of  the 
hands  of  a  watch.  It  follows,  then,  that  the  left-handed 
rotation  which  the  polarised  light  acquires  by  its  passage 
downwards  through  the  upper  tetrahedron  will  be  doubled 
by  its  passage  downwards  through  the  lower  one,  and  . 
the  crystal  will  be  laevo-rotatory.  Similarly,  (3)  shows  a 
dextro-rotatory  arrangement.  It  is  evident,  by  inverting 
the  figures,  that  the  direction  of  rotation  is  not  changed. 
Hence  we  have  the  inactive  molecules  of  racemic  acid 
(for  so  this  variety  of  tartaric  acid  is  termed)  in  (i), 


STEREO-CHEMISTRY  107 

laevo-rotatory  tartaric  acid  in  (2),  and  dextro-rotatory  in 
(3).  It  is,  of  course,  not  known  in  which  order  the  groups 
are  placed  to  produce  dextro-  or  Isevo-rotation,  but  the 
idea  is  easily  understood.  A  fourth  variety  of  tartaric  acid 
may,  of  course,  be  prepared  by  mixing  equal  weights  of 
the  dextro-  and  lasvo-  varieties  ;  it  is  inactive,  but  it  is  a 
mixture,  and  not  a  definite  compound,  and  it  must  not 
be  confused  with  the  racemic  acid  of  (i).  This  fourth 
variety  can  be  separated  into  its  constituents  by  Pasteur's 
device  of  crystallising  the  sodium  ammonium  salt,  and  sepa- 
rating by  hand  those  crystals  which  have  a  right-handed  facet 
from  those  with  a  left-handed  facet  ;  but  the  true  racemic 
acid  cannot  be  thus  resolved  at  ordinary  temperatures ; 
it  must  be  converted  into  a  salt  of  some  optically  isomeric 
base,  and  heated ;  on  solution  in  water,  it  is  now  found 
to  consist  of  a  mixture  of  dextro-  and  laevo-tartaric  acids, 
and  it  may  be  separated  by  crystallisation  of  their  sodium- 
ammonium  salts,  as  before  described. 

The  tetrahedral  form  appears  to  be  characteristic  of  the 
compounds  of  all  tetrad  elements ;  for  W.  J.  Pope  has  recently 
obtained  compounds  in  which  the  element  tin  is  combined 
with  four  different  groups,  each  containing  carbon  and 
hydrogen  ;  and  these  display  optical  isomerism  when  re- 
solved by  appropriate  means  into  their  stereo-chemical 
isomers.  The  same  has  been  shown  by  S.  Smiles  to  be 
true  for  compounds  of  a  similar  nature  containing  tetrad 
sulphur,  and  this  observation  has  been  confirmed  by  Pope. 
It  will  probably  be  found  true  for  similar  compounds  of  all 
tetrad  elements  where  they  hold  in  union  four  different 
elements  or  groups. 

The  stereo-isomerism  of  compounds  of  nitrogen  has  also 
been  proved  to  hold  by  J.  A.  LeBel.  As  nitrogen  is 
either  a  triad  or  a  pentad,  however,  the  tetrahedron  cannot 
be  the  fundamental  figure.  It  is  probably  a  pyramid  erected 
on  a  square  base.  LeBel  made  a  curious  discovery  in  this 
connection  :  it  is  that  the  groups  in  combination  with  the 
nitrogen  must  have  at  least  a  certain  degree  of  complexity, 


log  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

and  a  corresponding  high  molecular  weight,  otherwise  such 
isomers  are  not  capable  of  existence.  It  is  conjectured  that 
the  groups  combined  with  the  nitrogen,  if  they  are  not 
sufficiently  large,  change  places,  so  as  to  form  the  most 
stable  configuration  ;  it  is  only  where  they  are  large  that 
such  molecular  rearrangement  does  not  occur.  LeBel's 
work  has  been  confirmed  by  Pope. 

Stereo-isomerism  due  to  double  linkage.  —  There 
is  another  variety  of  stereo-isomerism  which  cannot  be 
detected  by  the  rotation  of  polarised  light.  It  is  assumed 
that  in  such  a  compound  as  tartaric  acid  (see  Fig.  7),  the 
two  tetrahedra,  shown  connected  by  their  apices,  are  free 
to  revolve  round  a  vertical  axis  joining  the  two  asymmetric 
carbon  atoms,  and  passing  through  the  point  of  junction 
of  the  two  tetrahedra.  Taking  (i)  of  Fig.  7,  if,  for 
example,  R  and  R'  happen  to  lie  on  a  line  parallel  to  that 
axis,  we  may  have  a  compound  different  from  one  in  which 
R  and  Q'  should  lie  on  that  line,  as  in  the  figure.  If, 
however,  such  a  configuration  were  to  exist,  it  would  not 
be  permanent,  for  owing  to  the  revolution  of  the  tetrahedra 
round  the  vertical  axis  passing  through  their  apices,  the 
original  configuration  would  be  produced,  and  R  and  R' 
would  again  lie  on  the  same  vertical  line.  Of  course  this 
is  on  the  assumption  that  the  relative  positions  of  P',  Q', 
and  R'  are  not  changed,  otherwise  an  isomeride  is  produced 
capable  of  acting  on  polarised  light. 

Now,  if  the  atoms  of  carbon  be  connected,  not  singly, 
as  in  the  instances  in  Fig.  7,  but  doubly,  such  a  power  of 
rotation  is  hindered.  Such  a  configuration  is  shown  in 
Fig.  8.  The  figure  may  be  derived  from  one  of  those  in 
Fig.  7  by  supposing  R  and  R'  to  be  removed  by  some 
appropriate  reagent ;  the  tetrahedra  will  then  be  joined 
along  one  of  the  edges  instead  of  only  at  the  apices,  and 
the  carbon  atoms  will  be  "doubly  linked."  In  (i)  of 
Fig.  8  a  double  tetrahedron,  like  that  shown  in  Fig.  7, 
is  reproduced;  (2)  shows  the  approach  of  the  two  solid 
angles;  in  (3),  R  and  R'  are  removed,  giving  the  new 


STEREO-ISOMERISM 


109 


configuration.  Such  a  compound  is  termed  "  unsaturated." 
By  addition  of  such  an  element  as  bromine,  the  com- 
pound again  becomes  saturated,  and  ( i )  is  reproduced  with 
bromine  atoms  in  place  of  R  and  R'. 


No.  (3)  of  Fig.  8  is  reproduced  in  Fig.  9(1),  but  the 
letters  have  been  changed,  so  as  to  represent  actual  groups 
present  in  two  acids,  named  respectively  fumaric  and  maleic 

FIG.  9. 


C02H 


CO-,11 


(1) 


C02H 


(4) 


acids.  The  formula  given  in  ( I )  is  that  of  maleic  acid. 
This  acid,  when  exposed  to  hydrogen  bromide,  HBr,  com- 
bines with  it ;  but  the  double  linkage  between  the  central 
carbon  atoms  is  thereby  broken,  and  (2)  is  produced.  The 


no  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

upper  tetrahedron  is  now  f»ee  to  rotate  round  the  axis 
joining  the  two  central  carbon  atoms ;  and  it  is  supposed 
that  rotation  takes  place  until  the  position  of  greatest 
stability  is  reached.  In  (2)  we  may  observe  that  two 
hydrogen  atoms  occupy  the  left  corners ;  a  hydrogen  atom 
and  a  bromine  atom  occupy  the  solid  angles  projecting 
towards  the  spectator,  and  two  carboxyl  groups  are  situated 
on  the  right.  By  rotation  of  the  upper  tetrahedron  through 
an  angle  of  120°  in  the  inverse  direction  of  the  hands  of 
a  watch,  H'  will  be  vertically  above  the  lower  carboxyl 
group,  H"  will  be  above  the  bromine  atom,  and  the  upper 
carboxyl  group  will  be  above  the  lower  atom  of  hydrogen, 
as  shown  in  (3).  If,  now,  hydrogen  bromide  be  removed 
(and  this  is  possible  by  treatment  with  caustic  potash), 
the  configuration  will  be  that  represented  in  (4)  ;  and  this, 
it  is  believed,  is  the  formula  of  fumaric  acid,  the  other 
isomer.  Fumaric  acid,  like  maleic  acid,  can  also  combine 
with  hydrogen  bromide,  but  on  its  removal  fumaric  acid  is 
reproduced. 

An  acid  containing  two  carboxyl  groups  often  has  the 
property  of  losing  the  elements  of  water  when  heated,  and 
yielding  an  anhydride ;  in  the  case  before  us,  C2H9  ( CO  OH  )  2 
=  C2H2(CO)2O  +  H2O.  Now  maleic  acid  afone  has  this 
property  ;  and  it  is  inferred  that  maleic  acid  must  there- 
fore possess  the  structure  ( I ) ,  seeing  that  the  carboxyl 
groups  are  conveniently  situated  for  losing  the  elements  of 
water,  and  their  carbon  atoms  for  being  linked  together  by 
an  atom  of  oxygen.  To  imagine  a  configuration  which 
would  pertain  to  an  anhydride  derived  from  (4)  would  be 
difficult. 

This  kind  of  isomerism  is  also  met  with  among  the  com- 
pounds of  nitrogen,  which,  it  will  be  remembered,  acts  often 
as  a  triad.  For  example,  substances  named  aldoximes  are 
known  in  which  nitrogen  is  doubly  linked  to  carbon  ;  and 
it  is  also  united  to  a  hydroxyl  group.  Such  substances  are 
known  in  two  modifications  ;  and  it  appears  probable  that 
the  two  varieties  possess  some  such  configurations  as  : 


TAUTOMERISM  in 

H— C— CH3  H— C— CH3 

II  ^d  || 

N—OH  HO— N 

which  resemble  those  of  fumaric  and  maleic  acids. 

Tautotnerism. — One  more  kind  of  isomerism  remains 
to  be  mentioned  ;  a  body  which  is  said  to  be  tautomeric 
appears  to  show  a  different  constitution,  according  to  the 
reagent  with  which  it  is  treated.  One  of  the  earliest 
instances  observed  of  a  tautomeric  compound  is  aceto-acetate 
of  ethyl.  Its  formula  is  : 

CH3— C— H2C— C— O— CH2— CH3, 

O  '  O 

as  shown  by  its  reaction  with  caustic  potash,  when  acetone, 
CH3 — CO — CH3,  is  formed,  the  scission  occurring  at  the 
dotted  line  ;  but  the  tautomeric  formula 

CH3— C  -  CH— C— CH2— CH3 


A-H       J 


may  also  be  ascribed  to  it,  for  it  can  be  shown  to  contain 

a   hydroxyl   group  by  the  action   of  diethylamine,    giving 

CH3—  C  -  CH  --  C—  O—  CH2—  CH3. 

C2H5-N-C2H5     O 

Other  reactions  point  to  the  same  possibility  of  rear- 
rangement. Examples  of  tautomerism  are  not  unknown 
among  compounds  of  elements  other  than  carbon  ;  it  is 
probable  that  two  sulphurous  acids  are  capable  of  existence, 


one  possessing   the  formula         /^\  and  the  other 

OH, 


O  =  S<^  .    Silver  sulphite  appears   to  be  a  derivative 

\OH 
of  the  first,  and  sodium  sulphite  of   the   second  of  these 


ii2  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

forms  ;  and  it  is   probable   that  the  particular  form  taken 
depends  on  the  reagent  which  is  presented  to  the  acid. 

Although  the  application  of  geometrical  formulae  has 
proved  useful  in  exhibiting  certain  cases  of  isomerism  such 
as  have  been  considered,  it  is  not  to  be  supposed  that 
formulae  to  which  grouping  in  space  of  three  dimensions 
is-4iot  usually  applied  do  not  also  require  three-dimensional 
space.  Their  use  is  not  common,  merely  because  the 
spatial  relations  are  sufficiently  evident  without  involving 
this  conception.  Most  of  us  are  content  with  a  picture 
as  a  sufficient  memento  of  our  friends  ;  but  if  we  wish  a 
fuller  presentment,  a  bust  or  a  statue  will  give  it. 


CHAPTER  VII 
Energy 

WE  have  seen  in  the  last  chapter  that  some  conception  can 
be  made  regarding  the  form  of  molecules,  supposing  them  to 
occupy  space  of  three  dimensions.  It  is  further  imagined 
that  the  atoms  in  the  molecule,  unlike  those  in  the  diagrams 
given,  are  not  quiescent,  but  are  in  motion  relatively  to  each 
other,  and  that  the  molecules  themselves  also  change  their 
relative  places ;  both  atoms  and  molecules  contain  what 
is  termed  "energy,"  in  virtue  of  this  motion.  When  a 
chemical  reaction  takes  place,  energy  may  be  lost  or  gained 
— lost,  when  atoms  or  molecules  assume  a  more  stable  con- 
dition ;  gained,  when  the  state  of  a  resulting  compound  is  a 
less  stable  one  than  that  of  the  substances  from  which  it  is 
formed. 

We  must  now  consider  what  is  meant  by  this  term 
"  energy."  Energy  can  exist  under  various  forms ;  for 
example,  when  a  stone  falls  to  the  ground  under  the  influ- 
ence of  the  earth's  attraction,  it  loses  energy  after  its  fall ; 
when  a  billiard-ball  is  set  in  motion,  for  instance,  by  the 
tension  of  a  spring,  the  spring  loses  and  the  billiard-ball 
gains  energy.  Energy  can  also  be  communicated  to  sub- 
stances in  the  form  of  heat  when  their  temperature  is  raised  ; 
it  may  be  imparted  to  a  body  in  the  form  of  an  electrical 
charge,  and  in  various  other  ways. 

We  have  already  seen  (p.  6)  that  Lavoisier  laid  down 
as  a  maxim  that  matter  can  neither  be  created  nor  destroyed. 
This  same  doctrine  holds  as  regards  energy  ;  but  there  is  a 

VOL.  i.  "3  H 


Ii4  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

difference  in  kind  between  matter  and  energy,  for  while  one 
form  of  matter,  e.g.  iron,  cannot  be  changed  into  another 
kind  of  matter,  such  as  lead,  one  kind  of  energy  is  con- 
vertible into  all  other  kinds  of  energy  quantitatively,  so  that 
no  loss  of  energy  occurs  during  the  -conversion. 

An  example  will  suffice  to  make  this  clear :  In  a  coal- 
mine the  steam-engine  serves  to  raise  the  coals  from  the  pit 
to  the  surface.  The  engine  expends  energy  in  overcoming 
the  attraction  of  the  earth  for  the  weight.  Whence  does 
the  engine  obtain  its  energy  ?  Obviously  from  the  expan- 
sion of  the  steam  in  the  cylinder,  for  steam  (or  any  other 
gas)  loses  energy  in  expanding.  The  steam  is  produced 
by  boiling  water  in  the  boiler  ;  water  absorbs  energy  in 
changing  into  steam.  And  this  energy  reaches  the  water 
in  the  form  of  heat  from  the  boiler  fire  ;  the  heat  is  pro- 
duced by  the  combustion  of  coal ;  and  the  coal,  which  is 
the  product  of  the  decay  of  wood  buried  under  the  surface 
of  the  earth,  must  originally  have  derived  its  energy  from 
the  sun,  the  rays  of  which  are  essential  to  the  growth  of 
plants. 

We  have  here  a  long  chain  of  transformations  of  energy ; 
the  chemical  energy  of  the  coal  is  transformed  into  heat, 
the  heat  causes  the  expansion  of  the  water  into  steam,  the 
steam  overcomes  the  resistance  of  the  piston  in  the  cylinder, 
the  motion  of  the  engine  raises  the  weight.  In  all  this 
chain  there  is  no  loss  of  energy  ;  it  is  only  transformed  from 
one  kind  to  another.  But  it  must  not  be  imagined  that 
each  kind  of  energy  is  quantitatively  transformed  into  the 
other  ;  for  example,  when  the  steam  urges  the  piston  forward 
in  the  cylinder,  some  of  the  energy  is  lost  by  the  friction  of 
the  piston  against  the  walls  of  the  cylinder,  and  is  converted 
into  heat ;  and,  indeed,  energy  tends  to  be  degraded,  that  is, 
to  be  transformed  into  heat-energy. 

In  almost  all  chemical  reactions  which  take  place,  either 
of  their  own  accord  or  on  rise  of  temperature,  heat  is  spon- 
taneously evolved.  When  that  is  the  case  the  reaction  is 
terrn^i  "  exothermic  ;"  but  "  endothermic  "  reactions  are 


ENERGY  115 

also  known,  in  which  hc^L.  is  absorbed.  Such  reactions, 
however,  do  not  take  place  spontaneously  at  ordinary  tem- 
peratures. All  the  phenomena  of  combustion  are  exothermic 
reactions.  We  are  familiar  with  many  examples  of  this,  as 
when  coal  burns,  when  hydrogen  and  oxygen  explode,  when 
gunpowder  is  fired — all  these  are  examples  of  exothermic 
reactions.  The  interaction  of  any  two  or  more  elements 
which  spontaneously  unite  to  form  a  compound  is  of  the 
same  nature  as  combustion. 

Endothermic  reactions — those  in  which  heat  is  absorbed 
— are  usually  only  possible  at  ordinary  temperatures  when 
an  exothermic  reaction  proceeds  at  the  same  time.  But  one 
point  must  be  noticed  here ;  it  is  necessary  that  both  the 
exothermic  and  the  endothermic  reaction  should  be  part  of 
the  same  chemical  process.  For  example,  the  formation  of 
chloride  of  nitrogen  by  the  action  of  chlorine  upon  a  con- 
centrated solution  of  ammonia  is  an  exothermic  reaction. 
Chloride  of  nitrogen  is  a  fearfully  explosive  body,  detonating 
with  the  least  shock  into  its  elements,  chlorine  and  nitrogen  ; 
but  while  it  is  being  formed  there  is  formed  at  the  same 
time  ammonium  chloride,  a  substance  which  is  produced 
with  great  evolution  of  heat.  These  two  reactions  are  part 
of  the  same  chemical  process,  and  they  are  expressed 
by  the  equation  4NH8+ 3C12  =  NC1S+ 3NH4C1.  It  is 
essential  that  both  ammonium  chloride  and  the  chloride  of 
nitrogen  should  be  produced  by  the  same  chemical  reaction. 
The  combination  of  nitrogen  and  chlorine  would  not  take 
place  were  any  other  exothermic  reaction  unconnected  with 
the  formation  of  nitrogen  chloride  to  be  going  on  in  the 
same  vessel.  The  elements  nitrogen  and  chlorine  do  not 
form  nitrogen-chloride  when  mixed,  even  under  the  influ- 
ence of  a  high  temperature,  nor  would  they  if  another  exo- 
thermic reaction  were  proceeding  simultaneously  in  contact 
with  the  nitrogen  and  the  chlorine.  Moreover,  in  order 
that  an  endothermic  compound  may  be  formed,  it  is  not  suf- 
ficient that  an  exothermic  reaction  take  place  simultaneously ; 
the  heat  evolved  during  the  exothermic  reaction  must  usually 


n6  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

exceed  that  absorbed  by  the  formation  of  the  endothermic 
compound. 

Endothermic  compounds  readily  decompose,  often  with 
explosion ;  when  they  do  so  heat  is  evolved  ;  the  compound 
loses  energy.  This  implies  that  the  elements  in  the  free  state 
or  any  other  products  of  the  decomposition  of  the  endother- 
mic compound  contain  less  energy  than  the  compound  before 
decomposition.  On  the  other  hand,  in  order  to  decompose 
exothermic  compounds,  heat  must  be  imparted  to  them. 
The  example  given  on  p.  31  of  ammonium  chloride  is  a 
case  in  point.  It  will  be  remembered  that  in  order  to  de- 
compose ammonium  chloride  into  ammonia  and  hydrogen 
chloride  the  temperature  must  be  raised,  and  heat  is  absorbed 
by  the  chloride  ;  hence  its  products  ammonia  and  hydrogen 
chloride  in  the  uncombined  state  contain  more  energy  than 
their  compound,  ammonium  chloride.  Other  substances 
similar  to  ammonium  chloride  are  known  which  dissociate 
more  gradually  than  that  compound,  and  the  characteristic 
of  all  such  dissociating  bodies  is  this — that  the  higher  the 
temperature  the  less  stable  they  are.  Even  water  when 
raised  to  a  temperature  approaching  2000°  C.  dissociates 
partially  into  hydrogen  and  oxygen.  Indeed,  the  rule  for 
all  exothermic  compounds  is  that  they  become  less  and  less 
stable  the  higher  the  temperature. 

The  opposite  is  the  case  with  endothermic  compounds  ; 
the  amount  of  heat  absorbed  by  the  union  of  their  con- 
stituents is  less  the  higher  the  temperature  ;  and  when  the 
temperature  surpasses  a  certain  point  peculiar  to  each  sub- 
stance the  endothermic  compound  changes  its  character  and 
becomes  exothermic.  But  it  is  not  often  possible  to  produce 
endothermic  compounds  by  bringing  the  elements  together 
at  a  high  temperature,  because  in  cooling  down  they  separate 
again  into  their  ^constituents.  It  appears  necessary  to  com- 
municate energy  to  them  in  some  form  other  than  heat. 
The  formation  of  ozone,  O3,  is  accomplished  by  passing 
the  silent  electrical  discharge  through  oxygen.  It  is  pro- 
bable that  the  disruption  of  the  oxygen  molecule  O2  into 


ENERGY  117 

atoms  is  produced  by  the  rise  of  temperature  due  to  the 
electric  sparks,  but  the  combination  of  some  of  these  atoms 
into  groups  of  three  (as  well  as  for  the  most  part  into 
groups  of  two)  is  probably  to  be  ascribed  to  the  energy 
which  they  receive  in  the  shape  of  electric  charges.  An- 
other instance  is  that  of  the  burning  of  the  nitrogen  of  the 
air  when  a  high  tension  current  is  passed  through  it.  Nitro- 
gen and  oxygen  do  not  unite  even  at  the  highest  temperature 
which  can  be  produced  by  the  combustion  of  carbon,  but 
when  a  high  tension  current  is  passed  through  a  mixture  of 
the  two  gases  a  true  flame  is  produced,  and  combination  to 
nitric  peroxide,  NO2,  takes  place.  This  flame  can  be 
blown  out,  and  it  can  be  rekindled  by  the  help  of  a  lighted 
match.  It  would  thus  appear  that  endothermic  compounds 
can  be  directly  formed  when  energy  is  communicated  to 
them  electrically. 

When  a  chemical  reaction  between  elements,  resulting  in 
the  formation  of  a  compound,  takes  place,  it  is  not  always 
that  compound  which  is  formed  involving  the  greatest  ex- 
penditure of  energy,  or  in  other  words,  the  greatest  evolu- 
tion of  heat.  It  is  quite  possible  for  a  compound  to  be 
produced  which,  when  appropriately  treated,  will  change 
into  a  still  more  stable  configuration.  Let  us  take  an 
example  :  When  chlorine  is  passed  through  a  solution  of 
caustic  soda,  the  most  stable  configuration  of  the  elements  is 
the  production  of  sodium  chloride,  water,  and  oxygen. 
But  the  reaction  proceeds  by  no  means  so  far  ;  it  ceases 
when  the  products  are  sodium  chloride,  sodium  hypochlorite, 
and  water  : 

2NaOH.  Aq  +  C12  =  NaCl.Aq  +  NaOCl.Aq  +  H2O. 

This  solution,  when  warmed,  undergoes  a  further  change, 
and  again  loses  energy,  yielding  sodium  chlorate  and  chlo- 
ride :  3NaOCl.Aq  =  NaClO3.Aq  +  fcNaCLAq.  But  the 
change  does  not  cease  here.  For  on  evaporating  to  dry- 
ness,  and  heating  it  still  further,  the  chloride  is  again  decom- 
posed into  oxygen  and  chloride  :  2NaClO3=  2NaCl  +  3O2. 


ii8  MODERN  CHEMISTRY 

This  final  change  is  also  exothermic.  A  mechanical  analogy 
for  such  a  series  of  transformations  may  be  found. 

Imagine  a  switchback  railway  on  an  incline,  those 
portions  of  the  rail  which  usually  slope  upwards  being 
nearly  level.  Further  imagine  a  carriage  started  over  the 
first  incline  so  as  to  roll  on  to  the  nearly  level  rail  ;  it  will 
stop  here  ;  and  it  will  require  a  further  push  to  send  it  over 
the  second  incline,  when  it  will  rest  on  the  second  level 
platform  and  require  another  push  to  cause  it  to  roll  over 
the  third  incline  on  to  the  third  level  platform.  These  level 
platforms  may  be  taken  as  analogous  to  the  intermediate 
compounds  before  chloride  of  potassium  is  formed.  As  the 
carriage  loses  energy  during  each  fall  but  stops  several  times 
before  all  energy  is  lost,  so  it  is  possible  to  have  a  number 
of  stages  in  loss  of  energy  before  the  final  stable  stage  is 
reached.  Such  cases  are  by  no  means  unfrequent  ;  it  is  not 
always  possible  to  trace  their  sequence  as  readily  as  in  the 
case  given,  for  it  is  not  always  possible  to  stop  at  the  inter- 
mediate stage  ;  but  intermediate  compounds  may  be  made 
otherwise,  and  they  obviously  belong  to  a  series  similar  to 
that  given. 

It  has  been  frequently  mentioned  that  application  of  heat 
is  necessary  in  order  to  start  a  reaction  ;  this  is  analogous 
to  the  push  which  must  be  given  to  the  carriage  in  order 
that  it  roll  over  the  incline  ;  if  left  alone,  the  compound  is 
stable,  but  the  imparting  to  it  of  an  exceedingly  small 
amount  of  energy  suffices  to  cause  it  to  lose  a  considerable 
amount  of  energy  in  passing  to  the  next  stage.  From  the 
molecular  point  of  view  it  may  be  imagined  that  the  applica- 
tion of  heat  causes  a  motion  of  the  atoms  within  some  of 
the  molecules  of  the  compound  ;  these  begin  to  adjust 
themselves  in  some  new  form  of  combination,  and  the  heat 
evolved  during  this  readjustment  is  imparted  to  those  mole- 
cules which  have  not  already  suffered  change,  and  causes 
them  also  to  assume  a  new  form  of  combination  attended 
with  loss  of  energy. 

Besides  losing  energy  by  loss  of  heat  during  the  formation 


ENERGY  119 

of  a  compound,  energy  may  be  evolved  in  other  forms.  It 
is  well  known  that  in  order  to  change  a  liquid  into  gas,  heat 
must  be  imparted  to  it,  or,  if  the  change  take  place  by  evapo- 
rating the  liquid  in  a  partial  vacuum,  the  liquid  itself  will 
grow  cold. 

Conversely,  when  a  gas  is  condensed  into  a  liquid  it 
parts  with  the  energy  which  it  previously  contained.  When 
a  solid  is  changed  into  a  liquid  it  absorbs  energy ;  when  a 
liquid  is  frozen  into  a  solid  it  loses  energy.  Now,  in 
many  chemical  reactions  the  products  have  not  the  same 
physical  state  as  the  substances  from  which  they  are  formed  ; 
and  in  this  case  energy  is  lost  or  gained  according  to  cir- 
cumstances. For  example,  when  carbon  dioxide  is  set 
free  by  the  action  of  an  acid  upon  marble,  a  gas  is  pro- 
duced, and  the  production  of  this  gas  is  attended  with 
absorption  of  energy ;  in  order  to  measure  the  amount  of 
this  energy  it  would  suffice  to  condense  that  gas  to  liquid 
and  to  freeze  the  liquid  to  solid  and  to  measure  the  amount 
of  energy  evolved  during  these  transformations.  It  would 
then  be  possible  to  ascertain  the  total  quantity  of  energy 
lost  during  the  chemical  change,  independently  of  the 
change  of  state  which  the  products  undergo  on  being  formed. 
But  this  is  not  all  ;  for  when  a  gas  is  produced  it  occupies 
space  and  displaces  a  certain  amount  of  air.  Imagine  the 
gas  to  be  evolved  at  the  bottom  of  a  vertical  tube,  which, 
of  course,  was  originally  in  communication  with  the  atmos- 
phere and  full  of  air  ;  the  gas  would  expel  this  air  from  the 
tube,  or,  in  other  words,  raise  it.  Now  air  possesses  weight, 
and  presses  on  the  surface  of  the  earth  with  a  weight  of 
1.033  kilograms  on  each  square  centimeter,  and  the  work 
done  by  the  gas  in  issuing  into  the  atmosphere  would 
depend,  in  the  instance  given,  on  the  sectional  area  of  the 
tube,  and  the  height  up  the  tube  to  which  the  carbonic 
acid  reached.  Here  energy  is  expended,  or,  as  is  usually 
said,  work  is  done,  in  raising  the  weight ;  and  in  estimating 
the  total  energy  of  the  reaction  mentioned,  this  work,  accom- 
plished against  gravity,  must  be  subtracted  from  the  total. 


120  MODERN  CHEMISTRY 

Many  measurements  of  the  heat  evolved  or  absorbed  during 
chemical  reactions  have  been  made,  chiefly  by  M.  Berthelot 
and  by  Professors  Julius  Thomsen  and  Stohmann.  The 
reaction  under  investigation  is  caused  to  take  place  in  a 
calorimeter,  and  the  heat  evolved  or  absorbed  is  measured 
by  the  rise  or  fall  of  temperature  of  the  water  which  it 
contains.  In  order  to  measure  heat  evolved  by  combustion, 
the  combustion  is  caused  to  take  place  in  a  vessel  enclosed 
in  a  calorimeter  ;  and  M.  Berthelot  has  introduced  a  very 
convenient  piece  of  apparatus  in  which  combustible  sub- 
stances are  caused  to  burn  in  a  steel  bomb  charged  with 
oxygen  at  a  high  pressure,  the  bomb  being  itself  immersed 
in  a  calorimeter. 

Inasmuch  as  the  heat  evolved  during  chemical  decom- 
position of  a  compound  must  be  precisely  equal  to  that 
absorbed  during  its  formation,  it  is  possible  indirectly  to 
arrive  at  the  heat  of  formation  of  many  compounds  of 
which  the  component  elements  will  not  combine  directly. 
Let  us  take,  for  example,  the  case  of  marsh-gas  or  methane ; 
this  compound,  which  has  the  formula  CH4,  is  made 
to  burn  in  a  vessel  enclosed  in  a  calorimeter.  The  heat 
evolved  on  burning  16  grams  of  methane  with  64  grams  of 
oxygen  is  21 1,900  calories;  that  evolved  on  burning  12 
grams  of  carbon  in  32  grams  of  oxygen  to  carbon  dioxide 
is  94,300  calories ;  4  grams  of  hydrogen  when  burned  in 
oxygen  yield  1 36,800  calories.  These  results  are  generally 
expressed  by  the  following  equations: — 

CH4  +  4o  =  CO2  +  2H2O  +  2 1 3,800  c. 
C  +  20  =  CO2  -f  94,300  c. 
4H  +  20  =  2H2O  +  1 36,800  c. 

Now  methane  is  an  exothermic  body ;  if  it  were  possible 
to  form  it  from  its  elements,  carbon  and  hydrogen,  heat 
would  be  evolved.  It  is  possible  to  imagine  it  decomposed 
into  carbon  and  hydrogen,  when  heat  would  be  absorbed. 
The  heat  of  formation  of  methane,  therefore,  is  obviously 


ENERGY  121 

the  difference  between  that  which  is  evolved  when  methane 
is  burned  in  oxygen,  and  that  which  is  evolved  when  its 
constituent  elements,  carbon  and  hydrogen,  are  burned.  In 
this  case  it  is  the  difference  between  (94,300+  136,800) 
—  213,800  =  17,300.  In  this  case  the  carbon  is  imagined 
to  be  solid  and  in  the  form  of  graphite,  and  the  hydrogen 
and  oxygen  to  be  gaseous  ;  if  the  carbon  were  a  gas,  to  begin 
with,  it  would  naturally  give  out  less  heat  on  its  combustion, 
because  heat  is  necessarily  absorbed  in  the  conversion  of 
solid  into  gaseous  carbon. 

It  might  be  thought,  without  due  consideration,  that  a 
measurement  of  the  heat  of  formation  of  a  compound  in- 
volves a  measurement  of  the  energy  which  it  contains ;  but 
this  is  not  so,  for  it  is  obvious  that  what  is  measured  is  only 
the  difference  of  the  energy  contained  in  the  elements  from 
which  it  is  formed  and  in  the  compound  which  they  pro- 
duce. We  are  as  yet  ignorant  of  the  total  amount  of 
energy  contained  in  any  element  or  compound. 

It  is  possible  by  suitable  appliances  to  obtain  the  energy 
evolved  during  chemical  combination,  not  as  heat,  but  in 
the  form  of  an  electric  current.  When  two  metals  are 
immersed  in  a  conducting  liquid  or  electrolyte,  they  at 
once  exhibit  a  difference  of  electric  potential ;  or  connect- 
ing by  a  wire  the  two  portions  of  the  metal  which  do  not 
dip  into  the  liquid,  that  metal  which  has  the  highest  electric 
potential  combines  with  one  of  the  ions,  and  the  electrolyte 
which  has  thereby  discharged  the  other  ion,  as  already 
explained  on  p.  36,  travels  through  the  electrolyte  until  it 
touches  the  metallic  plate,  when  it,  too,  is  discharged  and 
escapes  in  the  free  state ;  its  charge  enters  the  metallic 
plate.  The  result  of  this  action  is  that  the  chemical  com- 
bination of  one  of  the  metals  with  one  of  the  ions  of  the 
liquid  is  attended  by  the  formation  of  an  electric  current, 
and  not  necessarily  by  an  evolution  or  absorption  of  heat. 
Now  it  is  possible  to  measure  the  difference  of  potential 
between  the  two  metals  and  the  amount  of  electricity  which 
passes  through  the  wire,  and  thus  to  determine  the  amount 


122  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

of  energy  in  a  form  other  than  heat ;  by  this  means  the 
loss  of  energy  which  accompanies  combination  has  been 
frequently  measured. 

The  process,  however,  leads  us  further,  for  it  is  possible 
to  arrive  by  its  help  at  an  estimation  of  what  has  been 
termed  "chemical  affinity;"  it  is  of  the  same  nature  as 
electric  potential.  The  reason  for  this  statement  is  as 
follows  : — 

It  has  been  mentioned  that  energy  is  stored  up ;  when 
a  gas  is  compressed  the  amount  of  energy  stored  will 
obviously  depend  on  the  mass  of  the  gas  and  on  the  rise 
of  pressure.  Energy  can  also  be  stored  by  the  raising  of 
a  weight  above  the  surface  of  the  earth  ;  here  again  the 
amount  of  energy  depends  on  the  mass  or  the  weight 
of  the  body  raised  and  the  distance  through  which  it  is 
raised.  In  the  case  of  heat,  the  two  components  of  that 
form  of  energy  are  temperature  and  a  quantity  analogous 
to  specific  heat.  This  case  requires  a  little  further  con- 
sideration. The  amount  of  heat  absorbed  by  a  piece  of 
any  particular  metal,  say  copper,  for  heat,  obviously  de- 
pends on  the  mass  of  the  copper,  on  the  specific  heat 
of  the  copper,  and  on  the  temperature  through  which 
it  is  raised  ;  if  the  mass  be  doubled,  the  amount  of  heat 
which  that  copper  will  absorb  on  being  raised  through 
the  same  interval  of  temperature  will  be  twice  the  original 
amount ;  if  the  mass  remain  the  same  and  the  interval 
of  temperature  be  doubled,  the  amount  of  heat  will  again 
be  doubled.  By  choosing  another  metal  of  which  the 
specific  heat  is  twice  that  of  copper,  the  heat  absorbed 
by  a  weight  equal  to  that  of  the  piece  of  copper,  if  the 
second  metal  is  heated  through  the  same  interval  of  tem- 
perature, will  be  doubled.  We  see,  therefore,  that  heat 
energy  may  also  be  regarded  as  compounded  of  two  factors 
for  unit  mass  : — 

(  i )    The  specific  heat  of  the  substance. 

(2)  The  interval  of  temperature  through  which  it  is 
raised. 


ENERGY  123 

Electric  energy  may  also  be  regarded  as  compounded  of 
two  factors — 

1 i )  Electric  quantity  or  charge. 

(2)  Electric  potential. 

Now,  when  a  current  passes  through  a  wire,  the  quantity 
of  electricity  passing  depends  on  the  potential,  or,  as  it  is 
sometimes  called,  electric  pressure,  and  on  the  diameter, 
length,  and  material  of  the  wire.  The  total  energy  com- 
municated in  the  form  of  an  electric  current  has,  as  its 
factors,  the  quantity  of  electricity  passing,  and  the  potential 
with  which  the  electricity  is  urged  along  its  course. 

It  is  probable  that  chemical  energy  may  also  be  conceived 
to  consist  of  two  factors ;  the  one  is  generally  called  atomic 
or  formula  weight,  for  chemical  elements  and  groups  enter 
into  and  separate  out  of  combinations  in  quantities  pro- 
portional to  these  numbers.  At  the  same  time  it  is  pro- 
bable that  when  two  elements  unite  together  they  attract 
each  other,  and  that  this  attraction  depends  for  its  amount 
on  the  nature  of  the  elements  which  are  presented  to  one 
another ;  the  chemical  attraction  has  been  termed  affinity. 
Now  it  has  already  been  explained  on  p.  37  that  when  a 
current  is  passed  through  a  solution  of  an  electrolyte, 
it  is  conveyed  by  the  ions  present  in  solution  ;  and  these 
ions  are  composed  of  elements,  or  groups  of  elements,  each 
of  which  carries  one,  two,  or  more  electrons.  It  is  here 
evident  that  the  quantity,  of  an  element  or  group  which 
conveys  electricity  is  identical  with  the  quantity  which 
enters  into  combination  ;  it  may  be  termed  the  equivalent, 
and  while  the  equivalent  is  that  quantity  which  conveys  a 
unit  quantity  of  electricity,  it  is  also  that  which  serves  as 
the  unit  of  quantity  in  chemical  compounds.  It  would 
appear,  therefore,  that  one  of  the  factors  of  chemical  energy 
is  numerically  identical  with  one  of  the  factors  of  electrical 
energy,  and  it  follows  from  this  that  the  other  factor  must 
also  be  proportional  ;  that  is,  a  measurement  of  electric 
potential  is  equivalent  to  a  measurement  of  chemical  potential 


I24  MODERN   CHEMISTRY 

or  affinity.  Up  till  now,  very  few  experiments  have  been 
made  with  the  object  of  measuring  the  electric  potential 
of  systems  of  chemical  elements  ;  such  measurements  are 
much  required,  for  it  would  then  be  possible  to  arrive  at 
an  estimate  of  the  force  with  which  chemical  elements  and 
groups  of  elements  are  retained  in  combination. 


INDEX 


ACETIC  acid,  94 

Acetonitrile,  94 

Acids,  57 

Affinity,  chemical,  122 

,,  Airs,"  5 

Alcohols,  91 

Aldoximes,  in 

Allotropy,  74 

Alloys,  62 

Analysis,  5 

Anode,  35 

"  Aqua,"  34 

Argon,  73 

Arsenic,  density  of,  70 

Arsenic,  allotropic,  77 

Atomic   weight,  13,  65,  66,  67, 

68 

Atoms,  9,  52 
Avogadro's  hypothesis,  12 

BASES,  59 

Benzene,  96 

Bismuth,  vapour-density  of,  69 

Boiling-point,  rise  of,  29,  73 

Boyle's  Law,  19 

Bromine,  density  of,  69 

Butylene,  88 

CALORY,  14 

"  Calx,"  4 

Capacity  for  heat,  13 

Carbides,  61 

Carbon,  allotropic,  74,  75 

,,        stereo-chemistry  of,  101 
Chemical-energy,  123 
Chlorine,  vapour-density  of,  69 
Classification  of  compounds,  56 
Combining  proportions,  7 


Complexity  of  molecules,  44,  71 

Concentration,  25 

Conductivity,  35,  40 

,,  of  water,  43 

, ,  of  fused  sal 

Constant  proportions,  7 

D ALTON'S  Laws,  9,  22 
Dephlogisticated  air,  5 
Diffusion,  21 
Displacement,  47 
Dissociation,  31,  32,  33 
Double  linkage,  109 
Dulong  and  Petit's  Law,  13 

ELECTRIC  energy,  123 
Electrolysis,  35,  40 
Elements,  2 

,,         preparation  of,  45,  46, 

47. 

,,         classification  of,  49 
Endothermic  reactions,  115 
Energy,  113 
Equivalent,  15,  63,  64 
Ethane,  91 
Exothermic  reactions,  115 

FARADAY'S  Law,  35 
Fluorine,  density  of,  69 
Formulae,  52 
Freezing-point,  lowering  of,  26, 

73 
Fumaric  acid,  109 

GASES,  density  of,  16 
Gay-Lussac's  Law,  IT,  20,  21 
Gold,  allotropic,  80 
Graphic  formulae,  52,  92,  93 


125 


126 


INDEX 


HALIDES,  56 
Heat,  atomic,  14 
Heat  energy,  122 

,,      of  combustion,  120 

,,      of  formation,  120 

,,      specific,  14 
Helium,  73 
Hydrides,  56 
Hydrocarbons,  61,  92,  93 
Hydrogen,  density  of,  69 

,,  discovery  of,  7 

Hydroxides,  59 

IODINE,  vapour-density  of,  69 
lonisation,  40 
Iridium,  allotropic,  80 
Iron,  allotropic,  80 
Isomerism,  87 
Isomorphism,  17 

KATHODE,  35 

Krypton,  73 

"  LAW  of  octaves,"  50 

MALEIC  acid,  109 

Marsh-gas,  89 

Methane,  80 

Migration  of  ions,  36,  37,  38,  39 

Molecular  weight,  13,  68 

Monatomicity,  71 

NEON,  73 

Nitric  peroxide,  89 

Nitrides,  59 

Nitrogen,  stereo-chemistry  of,  89 

, ,         density  of,  69 
Nomenclature,  58 

OSMOTIC  pressure,  23,  24,  26 
Oxides,  56 
Oxygen,  6 

,,        allotropic,  77 

, ,        density  of,  69 
Ozone,  77 

PARAFFINS,  89,  90,  91 
Partial  pressures,  22 


Periodic  table,  50 
Phases,  81,  82,  83 
Phlogiston,  3 
Phosphides,  60 
Phosphorus,  allotropic,  77 

, ,  vapour-density  of,  70 

Polarised  light,  98 
Polymerism,  87 
Propane,  91 

RACEMIC  acid,  101 
Rhodium,  allotropic,  80 
Ruthenium,  allotropic,  80 

SELENIDES,  56 

Selenium,  allotropic,  79 

Silicides,  6r 

Silicon,  allotropic,  75 

Silver,  allotropic,  80 

Solutions,  33 

Specific  heat,  13,  16 

Steel,  80 

Stereo-chemistry,  98 

Structure  of  compounds,  55,  56 

Structural  formulae,  52,  92,  93 

Sulphides,  56 

Sulphur,  allotropic,  78.  79 

,,        vapour-density  of,  70 
phases  of,  84 

,,        stereo-chemistry  of,  107 

TARTARIC  acid,  101 
Tautomerism,  in 
Tellurides,  56 
Thallium,  density  of,  69 
Tin,  allotropic,  76 
,,    stereo-chemistry  of,  107 

UREA,  87 

VALENCY,  51,  52 
Vapour-densities,  68 

WATER,  phases  of,  82 
XENON,  73 


INDEX   OF   NAMES 


AVOGADRO,  II 

BACON,  4 
Becher,  3 
Beckmann,  28 
Berthelot,  120 
Berthollet,  7 
Black,  5 
Boyle,  4 

CANNIZZARO,  15 
Cavendish,  7 

D ALTON, 8 
Davy,  49 
Deville,  31 
Dulong,  10 

FARADAY,  35,  87 
GAY-LUSSAC,  10 

HlTTORF,  36 

KEKULE",  95 

LAVOISIER,  5,  58 
LeBel,  97 
Liebig,  87 
Lodge,  37 


MASSON,  38 
Mendele'eff,  50 
Meyer,  Lothar,  50 
Mitscherlich,  17 

NEWLANDS,  49 

PASTEUR, 101 
Petit,  ii 
Pfeffer,  24 
Priestley,  5 
Proust,  7 

RAOULT,  28 
Rey,  4 
Richter,  7 

SCHEELE,  5 
Schonbein,  77 
Stahl,  3 
Stas,  64 
Stohmann,  120 

THOMSEN,  120 
VAN'T  HOFF,  26 

WENZEL,  87 
Wohler,  87 


END    OF    VOL.    I. 


Printed  by  BALLANTYNE,  HANSON  < 
Edinburgh  <V  London 


Co. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $I.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


FEB 


385214 


30 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY